Nokia N76-1 User Manual
Nokia N76-1 User guide
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-135 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and othe r relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/ EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/declarat ion_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseries, N76, Navi and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corpor ation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or traden ames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transf er, distribution, or storag e of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product includes software licensed from Symbia n Software Ltd (c) 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which ha s been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is gra nted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial use s, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development . Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER N O CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS L ICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, N O WARRANT IES OF ANY KIND, EITH ER EXPRES S OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MA DE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS OF T HIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please che ck with your Nokia dealer for details, a nd availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence receive d , including interference t hat may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been create d and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia . Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIE S, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NO T 0434
LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE , MERCHANTABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICA TIONS WILL NOT INFRI NGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATENT S, COPYRI GHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIG HTS. Issue 1 EN, 9254268
1 Wa rranty and reference information 1. Contact Nokia ................................ ........................... ........... 3 Get help ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........ .......... ....... ........ 4 Find your phone label .......... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... 4 Updates ........ ....... ........... ....... ........ .......... ....... ........ .......... ........ ....... .......... ........ 4 Register your phone .............. ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... .... 4 E-newsletter s ............ ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... 4 2. Nokia One-Year Limited W arranty ............. ........................ 5 3. Message from t he CTIA ............................... ........................ 9 4. Message from t he FDA ............................................. ......... 12 9241365 9241365 Issue 2
2 LEGAL I NFORMATION Part No. 9241 365, Issue N o. 2 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of par t or all of the c ontents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. UNDER NO C IRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA BE RESPONSI BLE FOR ANY LO SS OF DATA OR INCOME OR AN Y SPECIAL, INCIDEN TAL, AND CONSEQU ENTIAL OR INDIR ECT DAMAG ES HOWSO EVER C AUSE D. T H E C O N T E N T S O F T H I S D O C U M E N T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S I S . " E X C E P T A S R E Q U I R E D B Y APPLICABLE LA W , NO WARRANTIES O F ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT L IMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W A RRANTIES OF M ERCHANTA BILITY AND FIT N ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, AR E MADE IN RELATION TO TH E ACCURACY A ND RELIABILIT Y OR CONTENTS OF THIS DO CUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS DOCUM ENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTI CE.
Contact Nok ia 3 1. Cont act Nokia If you ever nee d to call Nokia Care Contac t Center, you w ill need to provide specific information abou t your phone. Whet her you are calling about you r device or an enhancement, have the eq uipment with yo u when you call. If a Nokia representative asks a specific question about the enh ancement, you will have it available for quick referenc e. Nokia Care C ontact Cent er , USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #160 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel: 1-888-NOKI A-2U (1-888-665 -4228) Fax: 1-8 13 -249-9619 Web s it e: www.nokiausa.com/s upport In Canada call: Tel: 1-888-22-NOK IA (1-888-226 -6542) Web s it e: www .nokia.ca For TTY/T DD users o nly: 1-800-24-NOKIA ( 1-800-246-65 42)
Contact Nok ia 4 â Get help Find your pho n e label If you need to ca ll the Nok ia Care Cont act Center or your servic e provider, you will need to provide specific info rmation about your phone. This inform ation is provided on the phone label (1), which is on the back of the phone (unde r the batte ry). It contains the model and serial n umbers, as well as ot her important information about y our phone. To help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have the following information av ailable before c ontacting the Nokia Care Contac t Center: ⢠Your phone model number ⢠Type number ⢠Internation al mobile e quipmen t iden tity (IMEI) or electronic serial number (ESN) ⢠Your zip code ⢠The phone or enhanceme nt in question â Updates Check www .no kiausa.com /support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest ve rsion of thi s guide , addition al info rmati on, dow nloads, an d servi ces rela ted to you r No ki a produc t. You m ay also down load f ree config uration settings su ch as MMS, GPR S, e-mai l, and oth er serv ices fo r your phone m odel at www .nokiausa. com/phonesetting s . If you still requir e assistance, check the list of local Nokia contact centers at www.noki ausa.com/custome rservice or www.nokiausa.com/co ntact_us . â Register your phone Make sure to register your phone at www.warranty.nokiau sa.com or call 1-888- NOKIA-2U (1-888 -665-422 8) so that we ca n serve your need s better if you sho uld need to call a custom er cente r or to have yo ur phone re paired. â E-newslette rs When you re gister your phone , you can sign up for the Noki a e-newslette r, Nokia Connections. You will receive tips and tricks on using your phone, enhancement information, and special offe rs.
Nokia On e-Yea r Limite d War ranty 5 2. Nokia One-Y ear Limited Warranty Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this cellular phone (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is free from defects in material an d workmanship that result in Produ ct failure during normal usage, according to th e following terms and con ditions: 1. The limited warra nty for the Pr oduct extends for ONE (1) ye ar beginni ng on the date of the pur chase of the Product. T his one year per iod is extende d by each whole day that the Pr oduct is out of y our possess ion for repa ir under this war ranty. 2. The limited warranty extend s only to the original purcha ser (âÂÂConsumerâ ) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to an y subsequent purchaser/ end-us er. 3. The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the Un ited States of America . 4. During the lim ited warranty period, Nokia will re pair, or replace, at NokiaâÂÂs sole option, any de fective parts, or any parts tha t will not properly operate for their int ended use with new or refurbis hed replaceme nt items if such repair or replacement is needed because of pr oduct ma lfunction or failure durin g normal usag e. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts . Nokia will also pa y for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in re pairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warranty does not cov er defects in appearance, cos metic, decorative or structural items, incl uding framing, and any non -operative parts. NokiaâÂÂs limit of liability under the limite d warranty shall be the actu al cash v alue of th e Product at the time the C onsume r returns the Product for repair, determine d by the price paid by the Consume r for the Product less a reason able amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losse s or dam ages. T hese remed ies ar e the Consum erâÂÂs e xclusive remedies for breach of warrant y. 5. Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. 6. The Consumer shall bear th e cost of shipping th e Product to Nokia. Nokia shall bear t he cost of shipping the Pr oduct b ack to the Co nsum er after t he compl etion of service under this limited w arranty. 7. The C onsumer sha ll have no coverage or benefi ts under th is limited wa rranty if any of the followin g conditions are applicable: a) The Product ha s been subjecte d to abnormal use, abnorm al conditions, improper storage, exposure to mois ture or dampne ss, unauthorize d modifications, unauthorize d connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse , accident, alt eration, improper installation, or othe r acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shippin g.
Nokia On e-Ye ar Limit ed Wa rranty 6 b) The Product has been damaged from ex ternal causes such as collision with an object , or from fire , flooding, sand , dirt, win dstorm, ligh tning , earthq uake or damage from exposure to weather conditions, an Act of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or impro per use of any electrical source, damage caus ed by compu ter or internet vi ruses , bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to oth er products not recommended for int erconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defec t or malfunction of the Product with in fourteen (1 4) days after the e xpiration of the applicable limit ed warranty period. d) The Product serial number plate or the enhancement data code has been removed, defaced or altered. e) The defec t or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product. 8. Nokia does not warrant uninterru pted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the lim ited warranty period, the Consumer shall take th e follow ing step- by-s tep pro cedure: a) The Cons umer shall retu rn the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. b) If âÂÂa â is not convenie nt becau se of dis tance ( more tha n 50 mile s) or fo r other good cause, the Consume r shall ship the Product prepaid and insure d to Nokia. See www.noki ausa.com/ support for the address of the repair center neares t you. c) The Consumer shall include a return addres s, daytime phone number and/or fax number, c omplete description of the prob lem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicable). Expenses relate d to removing the Product from an installati on are not covered under this lim ited warranty. d) The Consumer will be billed for any pa rts or labor charges not covered by this limited wa rranty. The Cons umer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinstallation of the Product. e) Noki a will repair the Product under the limited warranty w ithin 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited wa rranty within 30 da ys, or after a reaso nable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, will prov ide a replacement Product or refund the purch ase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consum er may have the right to a loaner if the repair of the Produc t takes more than ten (10) days.
Nokia On e-Yea r Limite d War ranty 7 Please con tact the No kia Care Co ntact Cent er at the tel ephone n umber listed at the end of th is warranty if you need a loa ner and the repair of the Product has take n or is estimated to ta ke more than ten (1 0) days. f) If the Produ ct is returned during th e limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered unde r the terms and conditions of this limited warranty, the Cons umer will be notified and giv en an estimate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Produc t repaired, with all shipping charge s billed to the Consume r. If the estimate is refused, the Product will be return ed freight collect. If the Produ ct is returned after the expiration of the limited warranty peri od, NokiaâÂÂs normal servi ce policies shall apply and the Consumer will be responsi ble for all shipping charges. 9. You (the Consumer) unde rstand that the produ ct may cons ist of refurbished equip ment that c ontains used c omponents, som e of which ha ve been reprocessed. The used components comply with Product performance and reliability specific ations. 10 . ANY IMPLIE D WARRANTY OF ME RCHANTA BILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGO ING LIMITED WRITTEN WARR ANTY. OTHE RWISE, THE FO REGOING LI MITED WARRANTY IS THE CONSUMERâÂÂS SOL E AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECI AL, INCID ENTAL, PUNIT IVE OR CONSEQU ENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDI NG BUT NOT LIMI TED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED BENEFITS OR PRO FITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COS T OF A NY SU BSTITU TE EQ UIPME NT OR FACI LITIES, DOW NTIM E, THE CLAIM S OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY, RESULT ING FROM THE PURCH ASE OR USE OF THE PROD UCT OR ARIS ING FROM BREACH O F THE WARRANT Y, BREACH O F CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEO RY, EVEN IF NOKIA KNEW OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDE R THE LIMITED WARRANTY, OR LOSS OF USE DURI NG THE PERIO D THAT THE PROD UCT IS BE I NG REPAIRED. 11 . Som e states do no t allo w li mitati on of how lo ng an i mplied warran ty la sts, so the one year warr anty limitati on may not a pply to you (the Consum er). Some states do not allow t he e xclusion or limi tatio n of in cidenta l and conseque ntial damage s, so cert ain of t he abov e limit ations or exclu sions may n ot apply to yo u (the Consumer). This limi ted warranty gives the Consu mer specific legal right s and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
Nokia On e-Ye ar Limit ed Wa rranty 8 12. Nokia neither as sumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to as sume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that wh ich is expressly provid ed for in this limited wa rranty includin g the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13. This is the entire wa rranty betwee n Nokia and th e Consumer , and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition n ot containe d herein shall m odify these terms . 14. This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product between the Consumer and Nok ia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purch ase price. 15. Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months follow ing purchase of the Product. 16. Quest ions concern ing this limited w arranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Telephone: 1-8 88-NOK IA-2U (1-888- 665-4228) Facsimile : (813) 249- 9619 TTY/TDD Use rs Only: 1-80 0-24-NOK IA (1-800-24 6-6542) Websi te: www.no kiausa.com /suppor t
Message from the CTIA 9 3. Message from the CTIA (Cellular T e lecommunication s & Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones é 2001 Cellula r Telecommunic ations & Intern et Association. All Rights R eserved. 1250 Con necticut Ave nue, NW Suite 800, Washin gton, DC 200 36. Phone: (202) 785-008 1 Safety is the most important call you w ill ever make. â A Guide to Safe and Responsible Wireless Phone Use Tens of milli ons of pe ople i n the U .S. tod ay take advan tage of the un ique c ombi natio n of convenience , safety and value delivered by the wireless tel ephone. Quite simply, the wireless phone gives people the powerful ability to commu nicate by voiceâ almost anywhere , anytim eâÂÂwith the boss, with a c lient, with th e kids, wit h emergency personnel or even with the police. Each year, Americans make billions of calls from their wireless phones, and the numbers are rapidly growing.But an important responsibil ity accompanies those benefits, one t h at every wi reless phone user must uphold. Whe n driving a car, driving is your firs t responsibility. A wireless phone can be an invaluable tool, but good judgm ent must be exercised at all times while driving a motor vehicle âÂÂwhether on the phone or no t.The basic lessons are ones we all lear ned as teenagers . Driving requires ale rtness, caution and courtesy. It re quire s a he avy d ose of basi c com mon sens eâÂÂkeep yo ur he ad up, ke ep your e yes on the ro ad, check your mir rors frequ ently an d watch out for oth er driv ers. It requir es obeying all traffic signs and signals and staying within the speed lim it. It means using seatbelts and requiring other passengers to do the same. But with wireless phone use, driving sa fely means a little more. This broc hure is a call to wireless phone us ers everywhe re to mak e safety their firs t priori ty when behin d the whe el of a car. Wireless telecommun ications is keeping us in touch, simplify ing our lives, protecting us in emergenc ies and providing opportunities to h elp others in need. When it com es to the use of wireless phon es, safety is your most import ant call.
Message from the CTIA 10 â Wireless Phone "Safety Tips" Below are safet y tips to follow while driving and using a wireless phone which should be easy to remember. 1. Get to know your wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most phone s offer, including aut omatic redial and memory. Also, work to mem oriz e the p hone k eypad so you can use th e spee d dial func tion without taking your atte ntion off the road. 2. Wh en availabl e, use a ha nds-fre e devi ce. A numb er o f hands -free wir eless phone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your wireless phone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you. 3. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Make sure you place your wireless phone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an inco ming c all at an inconven ient time, if possible, let your voice ma il answer it for you. 4. Suspend conversations during hazardous driving con ditions or situations. Let the per son you ar e speaki ng with kn ow you are driv ing; if ne cessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather c onditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be haza rdous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, you r first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. 5. Do not take notes or look up phone numbe rs wh ile driving. If you are rea ding an address book or business card, or writing a "to do" list while driving a car, you are not w atching where yo u are goin g. ItâÂÂs common se nse. Do nâÂÂt get ca ught in a dang erous situati on because you are readin g or writing a nd not pa ying a ttention to the road or nearby vehicle s. 6. Dial sen sibly and ass ess the traffi c; if possibl e, place cal ls when you are not moving or before pulling in to traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip or atte mpt to coinc ide your ca lls with time s you may b e stopp ed at a stop sign, red ligh t or otherw ise stationa ry. But if y ou need to dial wh ile driving, follow this simple tipâÂÂdia l only a few numbe rs, check the road and your mirrors, then contin ue. 7. Do not engage in stressful or emotiona l conversations that m ay be distracting. Stressfu l or emotio nal c onversati ons and dri ving do n ot mix âÂÂthey a re distrac ting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel of a car. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend conversations which hav e the potential to div ert your attention from the road.
Message from the CTIA 11 8. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Your w ireless phone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situationsâ with your phone at your side, help is only three numbe rs away. Dial 9-1-1 or other loca l emerg ency number i n the cas e of fire, traffic accident, road hazard or medical emergency. Remembe r, it is a free call on your wireless phone! 9. Use your wireless phone to help oth ers in emergencies. Your wireless phone provide s you a perfe ct opp ortu nity to b e a "G ood Sa maritan " in y our co mmuni ty. If you see an auto accident, c rime in progress or oth er serious emergency where lives are in dange r, call 9-1-1 or other local e mergency n umber, as you would want others to do for you. 10. Call roadside assistance or a spec ial wirel ess nonem ergency assi stance number when necess ary. Certain si tuations you encoun ter while driving may require attention, but ar e not urgen t enough to merit a call for emerge ncy servic es. But you still can use you r wireless phone to len d a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing n o serious haz ard, a broken traffic signa l, a minor traf fic accident where no one appears injured or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or othe r special non-em ergenc y wireless nu mber. Careless, distracted individu als and people driving irres ponsibly represent a hazard to everyon e on the road. Since 1984, the C ellular Tel ecommunicatio ns Industry Association and the wireless industry h ave conducted e ducational outrea ch to inform wireless phone use rs of their responsibilities as safe drivers and good citizens . As we approach a ne w century, more and more of us wi ll take adv antage of the benefits of wireless telephones . And, a s w e t a k e t o t h e r o a d s , w e a l l h a v e a responsibility to drive safely.The wireless industry re minds you to use your phone safely wh en driving. For more information, pleas e call 1-888-901 -SAFE. For updates: http: //www.wow-c om.com/co nsume r/issues/dr ivi ng/a rticl es.c fm?ID =85
Message from the FDA 12 4. Message from the FDA The U.S . Food and Drug Administratio n (FD A ) pr ovides th e foll owing c onsumer inform ation about w ireless ph ones. See http://www .fda.gov/cellphones/ for updated information. D o w i r e l e s s p h o n e s p o s e a h e a l t h h a z a r d ? The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associate d with using wireless phones. Ther e is no proof, however, that wireless phones are abso lutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequ ency energy (RF) in the micro wave rang e while be ing used . They al so emit ve ry low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Wherea s high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects ca uses no known ad verse heal th effects. Ma ny studies of low le vel RF exposures have not found an y biological effects. Some studie s have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findin gs have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, ot her researchers have had difficu lty in reproducing those studies, or in determin ing the reasons for inconsistent result s. What is FD A's r ole co ncern ing the saf ety of wir eless phon es? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless ph ones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devic es. However, the agency has authority to take action if w ireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could re quire the manufact urers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to re pair, replace or recall the phone s so that the hazard no lon ger exists. Although the existing scientific da ta do not justify FD A regulatory actions , FDA has urged the wi reless ph one in dustry to ta ke a num ber of steps, in cludin g the follow ing: ⢠Support needed re search into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones; ⢠Design wireles s phones in a way that mini mizes any RF expos ure to the user that is not nece ssary for de vice function; and ⢠Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wi reless phone use on human hea lth. FDA belongs to an interagency working group of th e federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordina ted efforts at the federal level. The following agenc ies belong to this working group: ⢠National Institute for Occupation al Safety and Health ⢠Environmental Prote ction Agency
Message from the FDA 13 ⢠Federal Com munications Comm ission ⢠Occupational Safety and Heal th Administ ration ⢠National Telecom munications and Information Adm inistration The National Institutes of Health partici pates in some interagency wo rking group activiti es, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wirele ss phones with the Federal Commun ications Comm ission (FCC). All phone s that are sold in the United States must com ply with FCC safety guidelines tha t limit RF exposure. FC C relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also re gul ates t he base stations that the wireless phone netw orks rel y upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do th e wireless phones themselves, the RF exposure s that people get from these base station s are typically thousands of ti mes lower tha n those they c a n get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the p rimary subject of the safet y questions di scussed in this do cument. What is FDA do i ng to fi nd out m ore about t he possib le health effec ts of wirele ss phone RF? FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with group s of investigators arou nd the world t o ensure that high priority an imal stud ies are conducted to addres s important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in t he World Health Organization Internation al Electromagnetic Field s (EMF) Project since its ince ption in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the de velopment of a det ailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information do cuments on EMF issue s. FDA and the Cellular Tele communication s & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight , obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to in dependent investigato rs. The initial rese arch will include both labo rat ory stud ies a nd studies of wir eless phone users. The CRADA wil l also include a broad assessment of ad diti onal rese arch nee ds in t he c onte xt of the l ate st re sear ch developments aroun d the world. What ste ps c an I t ake to r educe my expo sure to radi ofreque ncy e nergy f rom my w ireless phon e? If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is proba bly very sma ll. But if you ar e concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few sim ple st eps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency
Message from the FDA 14 energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spe nt using a wireless phon e will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct ex tended conversations by wireless phone eve ry day, you could place more distance between you r body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connecte d to a remote antenn a. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that w ireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about th e RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. What abou t children u sing wirel ess phone s? The scientific e vidence does not show a dange r to users of w ireless phones, including childre n and teenagers. I f you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Redu cing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between t h e user and the RF source will reduce RF exposur e. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For e xample, the gove rnment in the United King dom distributed leaflets containing such a recommen dation in December 2000. They note d that no evidence exists tha t using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or othe r ill effects. Their recom mendation to limit wire less phone use by ch ildren was strictly preca utionary; it wa s not based on scientific evidenc e that any he alth hazard exist s. Do hands- free kits f or wireless pho nes redu ce ris ks fr om e xpo sure to RF e missi ons? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wi reless phones, there is no reason to believe that han ds-free kits reduce risks. Hands -free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone, which is the source of the RF em issions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand , if the p hone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wire less phones marke ted in the U.S. are required to meet safety requ irements regardless of whether they are use d against the head or against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.
Message from the FDA 15 Do wire less ph one access ories that clai m to shi eld th e head fro m RF radiatio n work? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phon es, there is no reason to believe t hat accessorie s that claim t o shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shiel d the use r from RF absorption use special phone cases, w hile others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studie s have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike "han d -free" kits, t h ese so-called "shiel d s" may i nterfer e wit h prope r oper ation of the p hone. The ph one m ay be forced to boost its power to compensa te, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In Fe bruary 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phon e users from radiation with making false and unsubs tantiated claims . Accordi ng to FTC, these defendants lac ked a reasonable basis to substant iate their claim. How does FCC Audit Cell Phone RF? After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will occasionally conduct âÂÂpost-grantâ testing to determine whether prod uction versions of the phone are being produced to conform with FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that does not me et FCCâÂÂs regulatory requirements may b e requ ired to remov e the c ell ph one fr om use and to refun d the pu rchase price or provi de a replaceme nt phon e, and may be subje ct to civil or crim inal pen alties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a ri sk of injury to th e user, FDA ma y also take regu latory action. The mos t important pos t-grant test, from a co nsumerâÂÂs perspective, is testing of the RF emission s of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any scientific meas urement, the re is a possibility that the test measure ment may be less than or gre ater than t he actual RF emitted by the phone. This difference between t he RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test meas uremen ts are limited by ins trument a ccuracy, bec ause te st measureme nt and actual use environments are different, an d other variable factors. This inherent variability is known a s âÂÂmeasurement unce rtainty.â When FC C conducts post-grant testi ng of a cel l ph one, FCC takes i nto accou nt any mea surement uncer tain ty to determine w hether regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory ac tion, it will have a sound, defensible scien tific basis. FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approa ch, given our cu rrent understanding of the risks presented by cellular phone RF emis sions. RF emissions from cellular phone s have not bee n shown to present a risk of injury to the user when th e me asured SAR is less than th e safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6 w/kg ). Even in a case wh ere
16 the maximu m measurement uncertaint y permitted by cu rrent measureme nt standards was added to the maximum perm issible SAR, the resultin g SAR value would be well below any level known to produ ce an acute effect. Consequently, FCCâÂÂs approach with measureme nt uncertainty will not result in co nsumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by cellular telephon es. FDA will contin ue to monitor studie s and literature reports concerning acute effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure to cellular tele phone RF (that is, the risk s from using a cell phone for man y years). If new information leads FDA to bel ieve that a c hange to F CCâÂÂs measu rement poli cy may be appropriate, FD A will contact FCC and both agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach. Updated July 29, 2003
17 Garantàa e información de referen cia 1. Contacto c on Nokia ......... ......................................... ......... 19 Solicitar ayuda ...... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... .. 20 Localiza r la etiqueta de su teléfono ........ ....... ........... ....... .......... ...... 20 Actualiza ciones ........ .......... ........ .......... ....... ........ .......... ........ ....... .......... ...... 20 Registre su teléfono ... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... .. 20 Boletines el ectrónicos .......... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... .. 20 2. GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1) Año .................. ......... 21 3. Mensaje de la CTIA ...................................... ...................... 25 4. Mensaje de l a FDA.......................... ........................... ......... 2 8 9241365 Edición no. 2
18 INFOR MACIàN L EGAL Parte No. 92413 65, Edición No . 2 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. Todos los derechos reservados. Se prohÃÂbe la reproducción, transferencia, distribución o almacenamiento de este documento en cualquier forma sin el previo permiso escrito de parte de Nokia. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, y los logos de Nokia Original Enhancements son marcas, registradas o no, de Nokia Corporation. Otros nombres de productos y compañÃÂas aquàmencionados podrÃÂan ser marcas o nombres, registrados o no, de sus respectivos propietarios. BAJO N INGÃÂN CON CEPTO NOKIA SERàRESPO NSABLE POR CUALQU IER PÃÂRDIDA DE DATOS O GANANCIA S O POR CUALQ UIER OTRO DAÃÂO ESPECIAL O INCIDEN TAL Y CONSECUENT E, POR CUALQUIER CAUSA D IRECTA O INDIRECTA. EL CONTENIDO DE ESTE DOCUMENTO ESTàPROVISTO "TAL CUAL". ADEMÃÂS DE LAS EXIGIDAS POR LAS LEYES, NO SE EMITE NINGUNA OTRA GARANTÃÂA DE NINGÃÂN TIPO, SEA EXPRESA O IMPLÃÂCITA, INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, GARA NTÃÂAS IMPLÃÂCITAS DE MERC ADEO Y DE CAPACIDAD PARA UN PROP ÃÂSITO PARTICULAR, EN CUAN TO A LA PRECISIÃÂN Y FIABIL IDAD O CONTE NIDO DE ESTE DOCUM ENTO . NOKIA SE RESERVA EL DERECHO DE R EVISAR ESTE DOCUM ENT O O DESCONTI NUAR SU U S O EN C UALQUI ER MOM ENTO SIN PRE VIO AVIS O .
Contact o con Nokia 19 1. Cont acto co n Noki a Si por alguna razón necesita llamar al Centro de Atención Nokia Care, deberá proveer datos especÃÂficos sobre su teléfono . Si está llamando s obre su dispositivo o un accesorio, tén galo a la mano al hac e r la llamada. De e s ta forma, si un represent ante de Nokia se le pregunta sobre el acceso rio, lo tendrá para fácil referencia. Centr o de Aten ción Nokia Care, EE.UU Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #160 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel: 1-888-NOKI A-2U (1-888-665 -4228) Fax: 1-8 13 -249-9619 Pág. Web: www .nokiausa.com/support En C anad á: Tel: 1-888-22-NOK IA (1-888-226 -6542) Pág. Web: www .nokia.ca Sólo para us uarios de TTY/ TDD: 1-800-24-NOKIA ( 1-800-246-65 42)
Contact o con Nokia 20 â Solicitar ayuda Localiza r la etiqueta de su teléfono Si necesita llamar al Centro de Atención Nokia Care o proveedor de servicio, te ndrá que proveer información especÃÂfica sobre su teléfono. Esta informa ción está en la etiqueta del teléfono (1), que se encue ntra en la parte posterior del teléfono (debajo de la baterÃÂa). Contiene el número de modelo y números seriales, al igual que otra información importante sobre su teléfono . Para que Nokia pueda responder a sus preg untas de manera rápida, fa v or de tener disponibl e la siguie nte informac ión antes de llamar al C entro de Atención Noki a Care: ⢠El número de modelo de su teléfono â¢T i p o ⢠Identificación del Equ ipo Móvil Interna cional (IMEI) o Número Electrónico de Serie (ESN) ⢠Su código postal ⢠El teléfono o acceso rio en cuestión â Actualizaciones Vis ite www.nokiau sa.com/s upport o su página Web local de Nokia para obtener la versión más rec iente de este manual, información adicion al, descargas y servicios relaciona dos a su produc to Nokia. Ta mbién podrÃÂa de scargar ajustes de configuraci ones gratuitos tal como M MS, GPRS, email y otro servicios para su modelo de teléfono en www .noki ausa.com/p honese ttings . Si aún necesita a yuda, consulte la lis ta local de Centros de Servic io al Cliente Nokia en www.nokiausa.com/cus tomerservice o www. nokiausa.co m/contact_ us . â Registre su teléfono Asegúrese de registrar su teléfono en www .warra nty .nokiausa .com o llame al 1-888-NOK IA-2U (1-888 -665-4228) para pode r servirle mejor si neces ita llamar al centro de servicio o reparar su teléfono. â Boletines electrónicos Al registrar su teléfono, podrá subscribirse al boletÃÂn electrónico de Nokia, Nokia Connections. Recibirá dato s o instru cciones s obre cómo usar su teléf ono, acce sorio y ofert as especiale s.
GarantÃÂa Limi ta da Nokia de Un (1) Año 21 2. Gara ntÃÂa Limit ada Nokia de Un (1) Año Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) garantiza que este teléfono celular (âÂÂProducto") está libre de defectos en materiales y mano de obra los cuales generan averÃÂas duran te su uso normal, de acuerdo a los siguientes términos y limitaciones: 1. La garantÃÂa limitada para el Producto cubre UN (1) año a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. El perÃÂodo de garantÃÂa de un año tiene una prórroga dependiendo de cuánto s dÃÂas el Compra dor no tendrá acceso al telé fono debido a la reparación amparada por dicha garantÃÂa. 2. La garantÃÂa limitada ampara al Comprador original ("Comprador") del Producto y no es ni asignable ni transferible a cualquier subsiguiente comprador/consumidor final. 3. La garantÃÂa lim itada ampara únicam ente a los Compradores que hay an comprado el Producto en los Estados Unidos de América. 4. D urante e l perÃÂod o de la garant ÃÂa limita da, Nokia re parará o repo ndrá, a elecci ón de Nokia, cualquier parte o pieza s defectuosas, o que no cumplan apropiadame n te con su func ión original, con partes nuevas o recon struidas si dichas parte s nueva s o rec ons trui das son neces ari as de bido a l ma l funci onamie n to o averÃÂa durante su uso normal. No se aplicará ningún cargo al Comprador por dichas partes. Nokia pagará también los costos de mano de obra que Nokia incurra en la reparación o reemplazo de las partes defectuosas. La ga rantÃÂa limitada no ampara los defectos en hec hura, las partes cosméticas , decorativas o artÃÂculos estructurale s, tampoco el marco, ni cu alquier parte inoperativa. El lÃÂmite de responsabilidad de Noki a bajo la garantÃÂa limitada será el valor actua l en efectivo del Producto en el momento que el Comprador devuelva el Producto para la reparación, que se determina por el precio que el Comprador pagó por el Producto menos una cantidad razonable deduc ida por el tiempo de uso del Producto. Nokia no será responsable de cualquier otra pérdida o perjuicio. Estos remedios son los remedios exclusiv os del Comprador para la violación de la garantÃÂa. 5. A solicitud de Nokia, el Comprador deberá comprobar la fecha de la compra original del Produ cto mediante un resguardo con fecha de la compra del Produc to. 6. El Comprador deberá asumir el costo de transportación del Producto a Nokia. Nokia asumirá el costo del embarque de regreso del Producto al Comprador una vez comp letado el servicio bajo esta garantÃÂa limit ada.
GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1 ) Año 22 7. El Comprador no tendrá derecho a ap licar e sta garant ÃÂa limitada ni a obtener ningún beneficio de la misma si cualquiera de las siguientes condici ones es aplicable : a) El Producto haya sido expuesto a: uso anormal, condiciones anormales, almacenamiento inapropiado, exposició n a la humedad, modificacione s no autorizadas, conexiones no autorizada s, reparaciones no autorizadas, m al uso, descuido, abuso, accidente, alte ración, instalación inadecuada, u otros actos q ue no sea n culpa de Nok ia, inc luyendo d años ocasi onados por e mbarque. b) El Producto haya sido estropeado debido a causas e xternas tales como, colisión con otro objeto, incendios, inundaciones, arena, suciedad, huracán, relám pagos, terre moto o deteri oro causa do por condici ones me teoroló gicas, factores de fuerza mayor o drenaje de baterÃÂa, robo, fusible roto, o uso inapropiado de cualquier fuente de energÃÂa; daños causados por cualquier tipo de virus, errores, gusanos, Caballos de Troya, robo de cancelación (Cancelbots) o perjuicio causado por una conexión a otros productos no recomendados por Nokia para la interconexión. c) Nokia no haya sido avisado por escrito por el Comprador del supuesto o mal funcionamiento de l Producto dentro del perÃÂodo de catorce (14) dÃÂas después de la caducidad del perÃÂodo de la aplicable garantÃÂa limitada. d) La placa de l número de serie del Producto o el código de dato del accesorio haya sido quitado, borrado o alterado. e) El defecto o daño haya sido causado por un funcionamie nto defectuoso del sistema celu lar, o por una inadecua da recepción de señal de la antena exterior, o por cualquier tipo de viru s u otros problemas de software que haya sido introducido en el Producto. 8. Nokia no garantiza ni un funcionam iento ininterrumpido del product o ni una operación sin errores. Si durante el perÃÂodo de la garantÃÂa limitada llegase a desarrollar un problema, el Comprador deberá seguir paso a pas o el siguiente procedimie nto: a) El Comprador deberá devolver el Produ cto al lugar de adquisición para su reparación o proceso de reemplazo. b) Si âÂÂaâ no resulta conveniente debido a la distancia (más de 50 millas) o por cualquier otra bu ena razón, el Com prador deberá embarc ar el Producto prepagado y asegurado a Nokia. P ara saber la dirección del centro de reparación más cercano, visite www .nokiausa.c om/supp ort .
GarantÃÂa Limi ta da Nokia de Un (1) Año 23 c) El Compra dor d eberá i ncluir la direcció n del rem itente, númer o tel efónico (de dÃÂa) y/o núme ro de fa x, una de scripc ión compl eta de l probl ema, resgu ardo de compra y a cuerdo d e servic io (si es aplica ble). Los gastos in curridos para r emover el Producto de una instalación no son cubiertos por esta garantÃÂa limitada. d) El Comprador será responsable de las facturas correspondientes a las partes o la mano de obra no cubiertas por es ta garantÃÂa limitada. El Comprador será responsable de cualquier gasto de reinstalación del Producto. e) Nokia reparará e l Producto bajo la ga rantÃÂa limitada dentro de un plazo de 30 dÃÂas después de la recepción del Producto. Si Nokia no puede realizar la repara ción am parada por e sta garan tÃÂa li mi tada den tro de 30 d ÃÂas, o tras una cant idad ra zon able de inte ntos de repa rar e l mismo de fecto, Nokia ti ene la opció n de pr ovee r un r epues to del Pr oducto o ab onar el pr eci o de c ompra del Produ cto meno s una canti dad razo nable aplicab le al uso. En ci ertos es tado s el Comprad or tendrá derecho a un teléfono pre stado cuando la reparación del producto pue da durar más de diez (10) dÃÂas. Contacte al Centro de Atención Nokia Care al número telefónico que aparece al fi nal de esta garantÃÂa si necesita un teléfono pres tado y si la re paración del Producto tardará/está calculado a tardar más de die z (1 0 ) dÃÂas. f) En caso de qu e el Producto haya sido devuelto a Nokia dentro de l perÃÂodo de la garantÃÂa limitada, pero el problema del Producto no esté cubierto por los términos y condicion es de esta garantÃÂa limitada, el Comprador será notificado y recibirá un presupuest o del costo a pa gar por el Comprador por la reparación del producto y gastos de envÃÂo facturado al Comprador. Si el presupuesto es rechazado, el producto será devuelto al cliente por mensajerÃÂa por cobrar. Si el producto es devuelto a Nokia después de la fecha de vencimiento del plazo de la garantÃÂa limita da, se aplicarán las polÃÂticas norm ales de servicio de Nokia y el Comprador será responsable de todos los gastos de envÃÂo. 9. Usted (el comprador) entiende que el producto consta de un ensamble nuevo que puede contener com ponentes usados los cuales han sido reprocesados. Los componentes usados cumple n las especificaciones de rendimiento y confiabilidad de l Producto. 10. C UALQUIER GARAN TÃÂA IMPLÃÂCITA O MERCANTIL PARA CUALQUIER PROPÃÂSITO O USO PARTICULAR D EBE LIMITARSE A LA DUR ACIÃÂN DE LA ESCRI TA GARANTÃÂA LIMITADA PRECEDENTE. DE OTRA FORMA, LA GARANTÃÂA PRECEDEN TE ES EL ÃÂNICO EXCL USIVO REMEDIO DEL COMPRADOR Y EN LUGAR DE CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÃÂA, EXPRESA O IMPLÃÂCIT A NOKIA NO PODRàSER REQUERI DO POR DAÃÂOS IN CIDENTALES, PUNITIVOS O CON SECUENCIALES O POR PÃÂRDIDAS ANTICIPADAS INCLUY ENDO, PERO SI N LIMITAR, A PÃÂRD IDA DE BENEFI CIOS
GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1 ) Año 24 O GANANCIAS ANTICIPADAS, PÃÂRDIDA DE AHORROS O INGRESOS, DAÃÂOS PUNITIVOS, PÃÂRDIDA DE USO DEL PRODUCTO O DE CUALQUIER OTRO EQUIPO RELACIONADO, COSTO DE CAPITAL, COSTO DE CUAL QUIER EQUIPO O FACILIDAD DE REEMPL AZO, TI EMPO MU ERTO, LAS D EMAND AS DE PER SONAS A TER CERAS INCLUYENDO CLIENTES, Y DAÃÂO A LA PROPIEDAD COMO RESULTADOS DE LA COMPR A O US O DEL PROD UCTO O CAU SADO POR UNA V IOLA CIÃÂN DE LA GARA NTÃÂA DE CONT RATO, NEGLI GENCIA , INDEMN IZACIÃÂN ESTRICTA , O CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÃÂA LEGAL O IMP ARCIAL, AÃÂN CUANDO NOKIA SUPIERA DE LA EXISTENCIA DE DICHO DAÃÂO S, NOKIA NO SERàRESPO NSABLE DE LA DEMORA EN LA APOR T ACIÃÂN DE SERV ICIO BAJO LA GARANTÃÂA L IMITADA, O PÃÂRDIDA DE USO DURANTE EL PERÃÂODO DE LA REPARACIÃÂN DEL PRODUCTO. 11. Algunos esta dos no permiten limitación de duraci ón de una garantÃÂa implÃÂcita, entonces puede que la garantÃÂa limita da de un año no le concierna a usted (el Comprador). Algunos estados no permiten exclusione s o limitaciones de daños incidentales y consecuente s, por lo tanto puede que ciertas limitaciones o exclusiones arriba indicadas no le conciernan a usted (el Comprador). Esta garantÃÂa limitada le concede al Comprador derechos especÃÂficos y legales y puede ser que el Comprador tenga otro s dere chos, los cu ales varÃÂan d e estado a estado. 12. Nokia tampoco asume ni autoriza a cualquier centro de servicio, persona o entidad autorizada que se asumiera para Nokia ninguna otra obligación o responsabilidad que no esté explÃÂcitamente provista en esta garantÃÂa limitada incluyendo al proveedor o al vendedor de cualquier garantÃÂa extendida o acuerdo de servicio. 13. ÃÂsta es la garantÃÂa entera entre Nokia y el Comprador, e in valida todos los contrat os o acue rdos ant eriores y cont empor áneos, v erbales o escrito s, y todas las com unicaci ones r elacionad as al Prod ucto y ningu na repr esentación , prome sa o con dición no me ncion adas en el prese nte modi ficar á estos t érmin os. 14. La garantÃÂa limitada indica el riesgo de falla del Producto entre el Comprador y Nokia. La indicación e s reconocida por el Comprador y se re fleja en el pre cio de venta del Producto. 15. Cualquier gest ión o acción legal relacionada a la garantÃÂa deberá ser iniciada dentro de los dieciocho (18) meses subsecuentes al envÃÂo del Product o. 16. Cu alquier pr egunta con cern iente a esta gara ntÃÂa l imit ada puede d irig irse a: Nokia Inc. Tel.: 1-88 8-NOKIA -2U (1-888-6 65-4228 ) Fax: (813 ) 249-9619 Sólo para usuarios d e TTY/TDD: 1-800-2 4-NOKIA (1-800-246-6 542) Pág. Web: www.nokiausa.com/supp ort
Mensaje de la CTIA 25 3. Mensaje d e la C TIA (Cellular T e lecommunication s & Internet Association) para todos los usuarios de teléfonos celulares é 2001 Cellula r Telecommunic ations & Internet Association. Todos los derechos reservado s.1250 Co nnecticut Av enue, NW Sui te 800, Wa shington, DC 20 036. Teléfono: (202 ) 785-0081 La seguridad es su deber más importante que tendrá que realizar. â Una guÃÂa para el uso responsable y seguro del teléfono celular Hoy dÃÂa millones de personas en los Estados Unidos aprovechan de la com binación única de comod idad, se guridad y valor qu e la tel efonÃÂa celular apo rta. Sen cilla mente, el tel éfono c elula r da a la gente la ha bilida d poder osa de pod er com unicar se po r voz - casi en todos los sitios a cualquier hora - co n el jefe, un c liente, los hijos, en caso de emergencia s o incluso con la policÃÂa . Cada año los ame ricanos hacen m iles de millones de llamadas con sus teléfonos c elulares, y aun la cifra as c iende rápidamente. Pero una responsabilidad importante acompaña esa s ventajas la cual es recon ocida por el usuario de te léfono celular. C uando está con duciendo, su respon sabilidad primordial es conducir. Un teléfono celular puede ser una h erramienta indispensable, no obs tante, el conducto r deberá tener un b uen jui cio todo el tiempo mientras está conduciendo - esté o no esté usando el teléfono. Las lecciones básicas son aquellas que habÃÂamos aprendido cuando é ramos jóvenes. El conducir requie re agilidad, precaución y cortesÃÂa. Necesita mucho sentido co mún - man tenga la cabeza en posi ción norm al, dirija la vista hacia el traye cto, comp ruebe los visore s con frecue ncia y prec aución con los demás conductor es. Deberá respetar toda s las señales de tráfico y man ten ers e dentr o del lÃÂmit e de velo cida d. De berá abro charse el cint urón de segu ridad y r eque rir que los otros pasajero s hagan lo mism o. Pero con el teléfono celular, el c onducir significa algo más. Este folleto es una lla mada a todos los usuarios de teléfonos celulares en todos los sitios para que la se g uridad sea su prioridad cuando están detrás d el volante. La tele comunica ción celu lar sirve pa ra ponerno s en contacto , simplificar nuestra vi da, protegernos durant e una emergencia y pr ovee rnos la oportunidad de poder ayudar a los demás. En cuanto al uso del teléfono celular, la seguridad es su deber más importante.
Mensaj e de la CTIA 26 â "GuÃÂas de seguridad sobre el uso del Teléfono Celular" A continuación, se r eflejan las guÃÂas de seguridad a seguir mientras está conduciendo y usan do un t eléfono celular las cual es deber ÃÂan ser fáciles de r ecord ar. 1. Conozca bien su teléfono celular y sus funci ones, tales como la marcación ráp ida y rediscado. Lea detenidam ente su manual de instruccio nes y aprenda a optimizar las opcio nes qu e el te léfono pueda ofrec er, inc luyendo rediscado auto mático y la memo ria. Tambié n, aprenda de memor ia el tec lado para pode r usar la func ión de marca ción rá pida s in la nece sidad d e quit ar la v ista d e la carret era. 2. Cuando esté disponible, use la función m anos libres. Hoy dÃÂa se dispone de una cantidad de accesori os manos libres. Aunque elija el dispositivo de montaj e instalado para su teléfono celular o un microteléfono, aprove che los dispositivos disponibles. 3. C o loque su telé fono c elular para un alcan ce fá cil. Ase gúre se de ub icar s u telé fono celul ar a la ma no, do nde lo pue da lev antar sin t ener que qu itar la vi sta de la carrete ra. Cua ndo entre una lla mada, si es po sible, que su buzón de v oz lo responda. 4. Posponga cualquier conversación mientra s esté conduciendo en una situación muy peligrosa. Como conductor, su respons a bilidad es prestarle atenci ón al tráfico. DÃÂgale a la otra p e rsona que usted e stá co nduciendo; si fue ra necesario, c ancele la llamada en embotellamientos o dura n te situaciones peligrosas d e tiempo. La lluvia, aguaniev e, nieve y hielo pu eden ser ta n peligros as como l os embo tellami entos. Como conductor, su re sponsabilidad es prestarle at ención al tr áfico. 5. No tome notas o busque números telefónicos cuando esté conduciendo. Si está leyendo un director io o tarjeta de negocio, o escribi endo una lista de "tareas" mientras está conduciendo, no estará al tanto de su ruta. Es caso de sentido común. No se involuc re en situaciones de tráfico pe ligrosas debido a que usted esté leyendo o escribie ndo sin prestar ate nción al tráfico y a los vehÃÂculos cercanos. 6. M arque con sensatez y esté al tanto del trá fico; si fuera posible, haga la s llamadas cuando esté estacionado o retirado de la carretera antes de hablar. Tra te de pla near sus llamadas antes de emprender el viaje para que sus llam adas coincidan con las señales de Stop, semáforo s en rojo o estacionam ientos. Pero, si es preciso h acer una llamada m ientras esté conduciendo, sig a esta norma sencilla: m arque unos pocos números, compruebe la carretera y sus visores, y lue go continúe. 7. E vite conver sacion es estr esante s y emotiv as que pu edan distr aer la atención. No se pueden combinar el conduci r y las conversaci ones emotivas y estresantes - es muy peligroso c uando está detrás del volante. Que la persona con quien e stá hablando sepa que usted está conduciendo, y si es neces ario, evite co nversacio nes de distracción.
Mensaje de la CTIA 27 8. Utilice su teléfono celular para pedir socorro. Su teléfono celula r es una de las mejores herram ientas que pu ede adquirir para protegerse a usted y a su familia en s itu acio nes pel igro sas - c on su te léfon o a su lad o te ndr á el soc orr o a su a lcan ce con sólo la marcac ión de tres números. Marque 9-1-1 o el núme ro local de emergencia en caso de incendio, accidente de tráfico, peligro en la carretera o emergencia médi ca. Recuerde, áes una lla mada gratis en su teléfono celu lar! 9. Use su teléfono celular para ayudar a los demás en tiempo de emergencia. Su teléf ono celula r le brind a la op ortuni dad perf ecta p ara se r "un bu en samarit a no" en su comunidad. En situaciones de accidente de tráfico, crÃÂmenes u otras emergencias de vida, llame al 9-1-1 o el núme ro local de emergencia, como usted quiere que los demás hagan por usted. 10. Cuando s ea necesario, llame al centro de asistencia de tráfico u otro número celular de ayuda para situaciones que no son de emergencia. Puede encontrar ciertas situaci ones cuando esté co nduciend o las cua les no merec en la necesidad de referirlas a los servicios de em ergencia. Pero sàpuede usar su teléfon o celular para echar una mano. Si ve un automóvil que no corre en medio de la carretera aunque no signifiq ue ningún peligro, seña les rotas de tráfic o, un accidente de tráfico sin nin gún herido, o un vehÃÂc u lo robado, llame a la asistencia o a otros números especiales de teléfonos celulares en situaciones que no son de em erge ncia. Las personas irresponsables, de scuida das, distraÃÂdas y los que conduzcan irresponsablemente representan un peligro en la carretera. Al acercarnos hacia un siglo nuevo, más ge nte se aprove chará de las ve ntajas de l os teléfonos celulare s. Desde el año 1984, la Asociación de la Industria de Telec omunicacion es Celulares (CTIA) y la industria celular han realizad o asistencia educativa para inform ar a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares de su responsabilidad siend o conductores cautelosos y buen os ciud adanos. Al acerca rnos hacia un sigl o nuevo , más gen te se apr ovechará de las ventajas de los teléfonos celulares. Y, al dirigirnos a la c arretera, todos tenemo s la r esponsabi lidad de conducir con cautela . La in dustria celular l e recue rda utilizar c on seguridad su telé fono mien tras conduce . Para más informac ión, llame a 1 -888-901-SAFE . Para datos actualizados, visite: http: //www.wow-c om.com/co nsume r/issues/dr ivi ng/a rticl es.c fm?ID =85
Mensaj e de la FDA 28 4. M ensaj e de la FDA U.S. Food an d Drug Administr ation (FDA ) para todos los usua rios de telé fono s cel ula res. Para informa ción actualiza da, visite http://ww w .fda.gov/ce llphones/. ÿSign ifican un pelig ro para la salu d los telé fonos celula res? La evidencia cientÃÂfica disponible no muest ra que ningún problema de salud tiene relación con el uso de teléfonos celulares. No hay pruebas, sin embargo, que los teléfonos celula res son absolutamen te seguros. Los teléfono s celulares emiten niveles bajos de radiofrecuencia (RF) en la gama de microonda durante el uso. También emiten nivele s muy bajos de RF en modalidad de inactividad. Mientras que los niveles altos de RF pu eden influir la salud (por calen tamiento) la exposición a un nivel b ajo d e RF no pr oduce efecto s de calentamie nto y no causa ef ectos adv ersos a la sa lud. Much os estud ios sobre exposic iones a nivel b ajo de RF no ha n enc ontrado efectos biológicos. Ciertos es tudios han sugerido que podrÃÂan resultar en ciertos efectos biológicos, pero tales encuestas no han sido confirmadas por estudios adicionales. En ciertos casos, otros inv estigadores han tenido d ificultades para reproducir tales estudios o determinar las causas de los res ultados incon sistentes. ÿCuá l es el pap el de la FD A co ncern iente a la seg uridad de lo s te léfon os ce lular es? Bajo la ley, la FDA no revis a la seguri dad de los productos que generan radiación, tales como, teléfonos celulares antes de su ven ta, como se hacen con medicamentos o dispositivos médicos nuevos. Sin embarg o, la ag encia tiene l a autor idad p ara realizar una acción si es mostrado que el nivel de la radiofrecuencia ( RF) emitida por los teléfonos c elulares muestra algún peligro para el usuario. En tal caso, la FDA podrÃÂa requerir a los fabricantes de teléfono s celulares que avisen a los usuarios del peligro de los teléfonos celulare s para la salud, y que reparen, o devuelvan los teléfonos para que el ya peligro no e xista. Aunque los dat os cientÃÂficos existe ntes no justific an las acciones reglam entarias de la FDA, la FDA le exige a la industria de t eléfonos celulares qu e establezca medida s, que incluyan las siguientes: ⢠Respaldar la invest igación necesaria h acia los posibles efectos biológicos del tipo de RF generada por teléfonos celulares; ⢠Diseñar los teléfono s celulares de tal manera que minimicen la ex posición del usuario a un nivel RF necesario para el funciona miento del dispositi vo; y ⢠Colaborar en la tare a de proveerles a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares la mayor información posible sobre los resulta dos generados por el uso de los teléfonos celulares en cu anto a la salud.
Mensaj e de la FDA 29 La FDA pertenece a un grupo de interagencias de las agencias federales que se encargan de los distintos aspectos de la seguridad de la RF para ase gurar los esfuerzos coordinados al nivel federal. Las agencias siguientes pertenecen a este grupo: ⢠National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health ⢠Environment al Protection Agency ⢠Federal Com munications Comm ission ⢠Occupational Safety and Heal th Administ ration ⢠National Telecom munications and Information Adm inistration El National Institute of Health participa tambié n en actividades del grupo interagenc ia. La FDA compart e con la Federal Commun ications Comm ission (FCC) las responsabilidades para teléfonos celulares. Todos los teléfono s celulares vendidos en los Estados Unidos deben cumplir con los reglamentos establecidos por la FCC que limitan la exposi ción RF. La FCC depend e de la FDA y otras agen cias sanitari as sobre los asuntos de seguridad de los teléfonos celulares. La FCC también re gulariza las estacione s base de donde dependen las redes de teléfonos c elulare s. Mientras estas e staciones de base funcionan con una pot encia más alta que los propios teléfonos celulare s, la exposición RF que el usuario podrÃÂa recibir de dichas estaciones bases es, en general, mucho más reducida que la RF generada por los teléfonos celulare s. Las es taciones de base no son el asunt o de las preguntas de seguridad tratadas en este documento. ÿQué está re aliza ndo la FDA para saber má s sobre los res ulta dos posibl es en la salud causad os por te léfonos cel ulares? Junto con la entidad U.S. National Toxicology Program y con otros grupos de investiga dores mundiales, la FDA está trabajando para asegurar que se e stán conducie ndo estudios altame nte prioritari os en animales para dirigir preguntas sobre los efectos de la exposición RF. La FDA ha sido e l participante lÃÂder en el proyecto Int ernational Elec tromagnetic Fields (EMF) desde su inicio en el 1996 , de la entidad World Health Organization. Como result ado poderoso de este trabajo se desar rolló una a genda detallad a de las nece sidades e n la in ves tigac ión qu e propuls ó el establecimiento de programas nuevos de investigaciones por todo el mundo. El proyec to ta mbién h a ayudad o a de sarrollar una ser ie de do cument os de i nformac ión pública sobre los asun tos EMF. La FDA y la Cellula r Telecommunica tions & Int ernet Association (CTIA) conducen un acuerdo formal denomin ado Cooperative Research and Developmen t Agreement (CRADA) para realizar investigacio nes de la seguridad en el uso del teléfon o celular. La FDA provee una v ista cientÃÂfica, consiguiendo las opiniones de los expertos de las orga nizaci ones académicas, i ndustriales y
Mensaj e de la FDA 30 guber namen tale s. La inves tigac ión fin anci ada po r la C TIA e s rea lizada por c ontra tos con inves tigadores independie ntes. La investiga ción inicial incluirá ta nto los experimentos en laboratorios como los estudios sobre usua rios de teléfonos celu lares . El pro yect o CRADA tam bién v a a a sesor ar amp liame nte los requ erimi entos en los estudios bajo el conte xto de los desarrollos de las investigaciones más reci entes por todo el mundo. ÿQué medidas puedo re alizar para re ducir la ra diofre cuen cia irrad iada p or mi teléfo no ce lular a la que es toy exp uesto ? Si existe algún riesgo de estos productos - y en este moment o desconocemos tal existencia - probablemente será muy mÃÂni mo. Sin embargo, si le concierne la prevención de posible s riesgos, haga estos pasos sencillos para minim izar la radiof recuen cia (RF). Pu esto qu e el t iempo es un factor c lave, en cuanto al ni vel de la exposición que una persona pueda reci bir, minimizar el tiempo de uso del teléfono celular redu cirá la exposición a la RF. Si tiene que extender su tiempo de conver saci ón con su teléfono celular, podrá alejarse del or igen de la RF, pu esto qu e el nivel d e exposi ción RF r educirá d epen diendo de la distanc ia. Por ejempl o, podrá u tilizar un aur icular y llevar el celu lar ap artado de su cuerpo o u sar un te léfono celu lar conectado a una a ntena rem ota. Se reitera que los datos cie ntÃÂficos no muestran que los teléfonos celulare s son peligrosos. Sin embargo, si le concierne la prevención de posibles riesgos, podrá adoptar las medidas antes mencionadas para reducir el nivel de exposición a la RF que se origina de los teléfonos celulares. ÿSigni fica un ries go para lo s niño s el uso de t eléfo nos ce lulares ? Las evidencias cientÃÂficas no muestra n peligro a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares, incluso para los niños y jóvenes. Si desea re alizar las medidas para reducir la exposición a la radiofrecuencia (RF ), las medidas an teriormente menciona das servirÃÂan para los niños y jóvenes que usan teléfonos celulares. Reducir del tiempo de uso del celular y aumentar la distancia entre el usuario y el origen de la radiofrecuencia minimizará la ex posición a la RF. Ciertos grupos patrocinados por otras entidades nacionales guberna mentales han rec omendado que los niños no utilicen teléfonos celulares. Por ejemplo, en diciembre 2000, el gobierno del Reino Unido distribuyó folletos conteniendo dic ha recomendación . Se han dado cuenta que no existen ning una e viden cia qu e el us o de te léfono s celu lare s pued a caus ar tu mores cere brales u otras enferm edades. Su re comendación de qu e los niños limiten e l uso de los teléfo nos ce lulares fu e sola mente a efecto prev entivo; no fue bas ada en nin guna evidencia de peligros para la salud.
Mensaj e de la FDA 31 ÿReduce el riesgo d e la expo sición a l a radiofrecuenc ia el uso de acces orios manos li bres c o n teléf onos celular es? Puesto que no existen riesgos a exposición RF irradiada por teléfonos celulares, no hay motivo para creer que el uso de equipos manos libres reducen los riesgos. Se pueden usa r los equipos manos libres co n los teléfonos celulares por ra zones de como didad y confort . Estos sistem as redu cen la po sibilidad de qu e la ca beza abso rba la radiofrecuen cia puesto que el teléfono , de donde se emite la radiofrecue ncia, se usa lejos de la cabeza. Por otro lado, si el teléfon o se lleva en la cintura o en otra parte del cuerpo durante su uso, entonces esa parte del cuerpo absorberá más la energÃÂa radiofrecuencia. Se requieren qu e los teléfonos celulares vendid os en Estados Unidos cumpla n co n las medidas de seguridad sin importar si son usados contra la cabeza o portados con cualquie r parte del cuerpo. Cualquiera de la configuración de ben cumplir con los lÃÂmites de seguridad. ÿSir ven com o deben los acceso rios de te léfono s que son pr omocion ados co mo protec tor para la cabe za contra la radi ación em itida po r RF? Puesto que no existen riesgos de exposic ión a la radiofre cuencia emitida por los teléfonos ce lulares, no hay motivo pa ra creer que los accesorios que protegen la cabeza contra dichas emisiones de verdad reducen los riesgos. Ciertos productos que son promocionados como protectores contra la radiofrecuencia usan fundas especiales para teléfonos, mie ntras hay los que no te ngan blindaje má s que acce sorios metálicos adju ntados al teléfono. Según la s investigaciones, en genera l estos productos no funcionan como son promoc ionados. Estos denominados "blindajes", no como los equipos "manos libres", podrÃÂa n interferir con la operación debida del teléfono. El telefóno podr ÃÂa ser provocado a elevar su potencia que podrÃÂa incrementar la absorción de radiofrecuencia. En febrer o 2002, la entidad Federal Trade Commission (FTC) denunció dos empresas que vendieron dispositivos que, como ellas alegaban, protegÃÂan a los usua rios de teléfonos celulares c ontra la irradiación e hicier on declaracione s falsas y reclamaciones no confirm adas. Según la FTC, estos demanda dos carecÃÂan de una base razonable para respaldar su de manda. ÿCómo ase sora FCC la radiofr ecuencia de un teléfono cel ular? Después de otorgar la licencia de mercadeo de un teléfono celula r particular, la FCC reali za, de vez en cua ndo, prue bas "pos t-gra nt" (despu és de otor gar) para det ermin ar si la producción de lo s modelos del teléfono están cumplie ndo los requerimientos estipulados por la FCC. Al fabricante de un teléfono c elular que no reúna los requerimiento s estipulados por la FCC se le puede requerir que retire el uso del teléfono celular y que abone el costo de la compra o que reponga el teléfono, y podrÃÂa ser somet ido a sanc iones delict ivas o civ iles. Además, si el teléfono si gnifica un riesgo de peligro para el usuario, la FDA también puede realizar una acción regulatoria. La prueba "post-grant" má s importante, desde la perspectiva del
32 consumidor, es la de las irradiaciones RF del teléfono. FC C mide el nivel de Specific Absorption Rate (SAR-TAE - Tasa de Absorción EspecÃÂfica) del teléfono, siguiendo un protocolo de pruebas muy riguroso. Co mo ocurre con casi cualquie r medición cientÃÂfica, es po sible que la medición de prueba pueda ser menos o más de la RF actual irradiada por el teléfono. Esta diferencia entre la medición de prueba de RF y la radiación RF actual es debido al hecho de que las mediciones de pruebas son limit adas po r la aut entic idad d el instr umen to, pues to que los ento rnos de la med ición de prueba y del uso actual son diferentes, y por otros factores variables. Esta variación inherente es denominad o "incertidumbre de medición". C uando FCC cond uce una medición "post-grant" de un teléfono celular, FCC se toma en cuenta de cualquier incertidumbre pa ra determinar la nece sida d de una acción regulatoria. Este paso asegura que cuando FCC toma acc iones regulatorias, éstas tendrán una base cient ÃÂfica defendibl e y exacta . El personal FDA revisó la metodologÃÂa usad a por FCC para medir la RF del teléfono celular, y estuvo de acuerdo que es un paso aceptable, en vista de nuestro entendimiento actual de los riesgos de las irradiaciones RF de los teléfonos celulares. No se ha dem ostrado que las irradiaciones RF de los teléfonos celulares presentan un riesgo dañino al usuario cuando la medida SAR es menos de los lÃÂmites de seguridad estipulados por FCC (un SAR de 1.6 w/kg). Aunque la medida máxima de incertidumbre permitid a por las normas actuales de medición fue agregada al norma máxima permitida por SAR, el valor resultante de SAR podrÃÂa aparecer menos que cualquier nivel que pueda producir un resultado agudo. Consiguiente mente, el pa so de FCC con incert idumbre de medición no re sultará en exponer a los usuarios a cual quier ri esgo de la RF irradiada p or los teléfo nos celula res. La FDA continúa a monitore ar los estudios y literatura de reportes referentes a los efectos severos de la RF de los teléfonos celulares, y referentes a los efectos crónicos de exposición a largo plazo a la RF del teléfono celular (es decir, los rie sgos que emanan del uso de teléfonos celulares por muchos años). En caso de que una nueva información da indicio a FDA a creer que un cam bio en la polÃÂt ica de medida de F CC podrÃÂa ser apropiado, FDA se pondrá en c ontacto con FCC y ambas agencias trabajarán juntam ente para des arrollar un paso mutu almente aceptabl e. Actualizado 29 de julio de 2003 Printed in / Impreso en 06/06
Contents For your safety ... .............................. .......... 7 Get connected .......................................... 10 Support .............................. ....................... 11 Nokia support and contact info rmation .......... ......... .... 11 Help ........ ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 11 Get started ................... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ....... 11 Additional applications ...... ...................... .................. ....... 11 Your Nokia N76 . ...................................... 12 Software updates ............ ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... 12 Settings ............ ........... ..................... ........... ......... ........... ....... 12 Welcome .............. ............ ........... .................... ............ ........... 12 Modes .......... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ............. 12 Keys and navigation ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... 14 Transfer content from another de vice .......... .............. .. 16 Essential indicators....... ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... 17 Power saver LED ................... ......... ........... ........... ............ .... 18 Volume and loudspeaker cont rol .................. ........... ....... 18 Keypad lock (key guard) ............ ............ ........... ........... ....... 18 Headset ..... ........... ..................... ......... ......... ........... ......... ....... 18 Memory card ...... ..................... ........... ......... ............ ........... .. 19 File manager .............. ............ .................... ........... ............... 19 Media applications .... .............................. 21 Music player ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... .......... 21 Visual Radio ........ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 25 RealPlayer ....... ........... .................................. .................. ...... 27 Adobe Flash Player ......... ........... .................................. ...... 28 Nokia Lifeblog ......... ........... .................................. ......... ...... 28 Camera ........................ .............................. 29 Take pictures ............ ........... ..................... ........... ......... ........ 29 Still image camera indicators ....... ........... .................. ...... 30 Active toolbar ............... ............ ............................. ......... ...... 31 After taking a picture ................... ........... ....................... ... 31 Still image camera settin gs...................... .................. ...... 32 Flash ............ ......... ........... .......... ........... .................... ......... ...... 33 Setup settingsâÂÂcolor and lighting .. ............ ........... ........ 33 Scenes ........ ........... ..................... ......... ........... ......... ............ ... 34 Take pictures in a seque nce ................... ........... ............ ... 34 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer .......... ............ ........... ........ 35 Record videos .................. ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... . 35 Gallery ...................................... ............... 38
View and browse files ................... ............ ........... ........... ... 38 Print Basket ............. ......... ............ ........... ..................... .........40 Albums .................... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 40 Free memory .................. ............ ........... .................... ............40 Image prin t ............ ..................... ......... ........... .................... ... 41 Print online ............ ........... ............ ........... ..................... ......... 42 Online sharing ........... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 42 Edit images ................. ........... .................... ............ ........... ..... 42 Edit video clips ............ ........... ....................................... .......43 Slide show ............. ........... .................................. ............ ....... 43 Presentation s ................... ..................... ........... ......... ............44 Movie director ........ ............ ......... ........... ........... ................... 44 Personalize your device .......................... 47 ProfilesâÂÂset tones ................ ............ ........... ......... ........... ... 47 Change the look of your device .............................. ....... 48 Active standby mode ..... ............ .................................. ....... 49 Web browser ............... ........................... 51 Connection security ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 51 Bookmarks v iew ................. ......... ........... ......... ............ .........51 Browse the w eb ................. ........... ......... ........... ................... 52 End connection ........... ........... ............ .................... ........... ... 55 Settings ................ ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ..... 56 Connections .......................... ................... 58 Connection manager .............. ........... ........... ..................... 58 Bluetooth connectivity ................ ............ ........... ........... ... 58 USB ........... ......... ........... .................... ......... ............ ................ 61 PC connections .................. ........... .................... ............ ....... 62 Synchronization ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ... 62 Device manager .................... ............ ......... ........... ........... ... 62 Download! .................................. .............63 Settings for Download!........ ............ ........... ........... ............ 63 Time management ............... .................... 65 Clock ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ..... 65 Calendar .... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 65 Messaging .................................. .............67 Text modes ............ ........... .................................. ............ ....... 68 Write and send messa ges ................... ....................... ....... 68 InboxâÂÂreceive me ssages ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 69 Mailbox .......... ............ ...................... .............................. ....... 71 View messages on a SIM card ............. ....................... ..... 72 Messagin g settings .................. ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 73 IMâÂÂinstant messaging ..................... ........... ............ ......... 77 Make calls ..... ...................................... .....78 Voice calls ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... .............. 78 Video calls ........... ........... ............ .................... ........... ......... ... 80 Video sharing............... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 82
Answer or decline a call .................. ........... ............ ........... 84 Log .......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 85 Push to talk ................ ............ .................... ............ ........... .. 86 Contacts (phonebook) .................... ........88 Save and edit names a nd numbers ......................... ....... 88 Copy contacts .................. ........... ............ .................... ......... 89 Add ringing tones for contacts .............. ............ ............. 90 Create contact groups .............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 90 Office .................. ...................................... 91 Calculator ....... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... .................. 91 Adobe Reader ....... ...................... ....................... ........... ....... 91 Converter ... ......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ..................... .. 91 Notes .... ........... ......... ........... ..................... ......... ........... ......... 92 Recorder ....... ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ .................... 92 Wireless Keyboard ................ ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 92 Tools .................... .............................. ........93 Application manager ...... ............ ........... ........... ......... ....... 93 Digital rights management ......... ........... .................. ....... 95 Voice commands ...... ............ ........................................ ...... 96 Positionin g .................. ............ .................... ......... ........... ...... 97 Settings .................................... ............... 98 General ...... ........... ..................... ........... ..................... ........... . 98 Positionin g .................. ............ .................... ......... ........... ....103 Phone ........ ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... .... 103 Connection ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ....................105 Applications ........... ...................... ....................... ......... ...... 108 Troubleshooting: Q&A ......................... 109 Battery information .......... ................... 112 Charging and discharging.............. ........... ............ ..........112 Nokia battery authe ntication guidelines ...................112 Care and maintenance ......................... 115 Additional safety information . ............ 117 Index ............ ...................................... .... 120
7 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUEL ING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessa rily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTER IES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
8 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompat ible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter th e emergency number, then press the ca ll key. Give your lo cation. Do not end the call until gi ven permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is app roved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, a nd 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for mor e information abo ut networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like computer s, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmfu l content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To incr ease the security of your device, consider installing, us ing, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 97, 2000, and XP). Not all f ile formats ca n be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data co nnection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have preinstalled bookmark s and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also ac cess other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not
9 affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These featur es are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur se rvice provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what c harges will apply. Some networ ks may have limitati ons that af fect how you can use network services. For instance, some network s may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabl ed or not activat ed in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider f or more information . This device supports WAP 2. 0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the ba ttery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a AC-3, or AC-4 charger and from an AC- 1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with a CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-4B. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approv ed enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Get connected 10 Get connected Use your device on the 2G and 3G networks. See About your device, p. 8. Use Bluetooth technology to tr ansfe r files and c onnect to compatible enhancements. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. Use the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) to connect to compatible headsets and hea dphones. See âÂÂHeadsetâÂÂ, p. 18. Use a compatible data cable, for example the Nokia Connectivity Cable DKE-2, to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61. Use a compatibl e microSD ca rd to transfer dat a or back up information. See âÂÂMemory card toolâÂÂ, p. 19.
Support 11 Support Model number: Nokia N76-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N76. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. On the website, you can get information on the use of Nokia products and services. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nok ia contact centers at www.nokia.com/customerservice. For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia servi ce center at www.nokia.com/repair. Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired applicati on to view its help t opics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information and instructions for setting up the device f or use. Additional applications There are various applicatio ns provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers to help you do more with your Nokia N76. Th ese applications are explained in the guides that are available at the Nokia N76 product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e.
Your Nokia N76 12 Your Nokia N76 Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband inte rnet access , and a compatib le data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, a nd mobile internet settings auto matically configured in the device, based upon your wi reless service provider information . You may have settings from you r service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the service providers as a special message. To change the general settings in your device, such as language, the standby mode and display settings, see âÂÂPhoneâÂÂ, p. 103. Welcome When you switch on your device for the first time, Welcome opens. Select from the following: Settings wizard âÂÂto configure various settings. Data transfer âÂÂto transfer content, such as contac ts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See âÂÂTransfer content from another deviceâÂÂ, p. 1 6. To open Welcome later, press , and select Applications > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications in their own menu locations. Modes Your device has two operating modes: with the fold closed for access to particular features including Music player , Radio , Camera and Me ssaging , and with the fold open for traditional mobile phone use and access to all the featur es on your device.
Your Nokia N76 13 Fold closedâÂÂcover display When the fold is cl osed, the main display deactivates, and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls end, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a compatible headset is connected. To change the settings, see âÂÂCov er displayâ p. 49. If you are using Music player or Visual Radio to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play . With the fold closed, the cover display provides clock and status information. In the standby mode, the signal strength and battery indicators, time information, and the status indicators may be displayed. If you are u sing Music player to listen to a sound clip, volume bars and track information are displayed. To play, pause, or play the next or previous sound clip, use the quick cove r keys. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. If you are using Visual Radio with the fold cl osed, volume bars and station information are displayed. To turn the radio on or off and select the next or pr evious saved station, use the media keys. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. If you are usin g Camera with the fold closed, hold the device in landscape. The outer display becomes the viewfinder. To activate the camer a, press and hold . To zoom in or out, press the volume keys up or down. To take a picture, press . T o switch between Image mode and Video mode , press . To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, press to activate the toolbar, and use the volume keys to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. Calendar and clock alarms, no tes for missed calls, and new received messages are also di splayed. To view received text messages and the text an d image objects of received multimedia messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main disp lay. See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 69. Incoming calls are indica ted by their normal tone and a note. In the cover display setti ngs, select Answer if fold opened to answer a call when you open the fold. If a compatible headset is connect ed to the device, press . To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 49. To make calls or use the me nu, open the fold. To lock the keys, see âÂÂKeypad lock (keyguard)âÂÂ, p. 18.
Your Nokia N76 14 Fold openâÂÂmain display When you open the fold, the main display lights up, the keypad is available, and you can access the menu. To access the menu, press . The fold opens about 165 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more. Keys and navigation See the get started guide for a complete list of all the keys and parts in your device. Menu key With the menu key, you can access the main menu. In an open application, press to make the application run in the background. To swi tch between open ap plications, press and hold . Navi⢠scroll key Hereinafter referred to as the scroll key. Use the scroll key to mov e around the menus ( , , , ), and to select items ( ). Tip! When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, , and to quickly access the applications. Fo r example, in the main menu, press to ope n Calendar . Multimedia key With the multimedia key, you have quick a ccess to multimedia content and predefined applications. To open the shortcut assigned to the mult imedia key, press and hold . To open a list of multimedia applications, press . To open the desired application, use the scroll key. To exit the list without selecting an application, press . To change the shortcuts, press and . To change the applications that are shown when you press , select Top , Left , Middle , and Right and the applicati on. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them. Edit key To copy and paste text, press and hold to select letters and words. Press or to highlight text. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To
Your Nokia N76 15 insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release . In Messaging , use the edit key to turn predictive text on, enter in the number mode, insert a symbol, and change the writing language. See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67. Mode key The mode key is a mult ifunction key, allowing y ou to switch easily between select ed applications, and change the views within certain applications when the fold is closed. With the fold open, press to o pen the latest photo in Gallery . With the fold open, in Gallery , press to swi tch between Images & video and thumbnail views. With the fold closed, in Camera , press to switch between Image mode and Video mode . With the fold closed, in Music player , press to switch between Now playin g and Music library . With the fold closed, in Visual Radio , press to switch between channel and channel list views. Tip! To only see the wallpaper on the cover display, press the mode key twice in the standby mode. Capture key Press and hold to activat e the main camera in the fold-closed mode. Press to take pictures. See âÂÂTake picturesâÂÂ, p. 29. In Video mode , press to record video clips. See âÂÂRecord videosâÂÂ, p. 35. Quick cover keys Use the quick cover keys ( , , and ) to control playba ck. See âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 21, and âÂÂVisual RadioâÂÂ, p. 25. Use the quick cover keys to lock the keypad with the fold closed. See âÂÂKeypad lock (keyguard)âÂÂ, p. 18. Press to activate the acti ve toolbar when using the camera in the fold-closed mode. See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. Volume keys To control the volume, see âÂÂVolume and loudspeaker controlâÂÂ, p. 18.
Your Nokia N76 16 Use the volume keys to scroll up or down in a list in the fold-closed mode. Use the volume keys to zoom in and out when using the camera. You can also use the volume keys t o scroll through the active toolbar with the fold clos ed. See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. Transfer content from another device You can transfer con tent, such as contacts, f rom a compatible Nokia device to your Nokia N76 using Bluetooth connectivity. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If the other device supports synchronization, you can also synchronize data be tween the other device and your Nokia N76. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When Nokia N76 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content 1 To use the application for the first time, on your Nokia N76, select it in Welcome , or press , and select Tools > Transfer . If you have used the application before and want to star t a new transfer, select Transfer data . 2 To have Nokia N76 search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. On your Nokia N76, enter a code (1âÂÂ16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. For some phone models, the transfer application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Data transfer on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 3 From your Nokia N76, selec t the content you want to transfer from the other device. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding locat ion in your Nokia N76. Transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel the transfer and continue later. If the other device supports synchronization, you can keep the data up-to-date in both devices. To start a synchronization with a compatible Nokia device, select Phones , scroll to the device, and select Options > Synchronise . Follow the instructions on the display.
Your Nokia N76 17 The synchronization is two-way. If a n item is d eleted in one device, it is deleted in bot h. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronization. To view the log of a previous transf er, select Transfer log . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You ha ve one or mor e unread me ssages in th e Inbox folder in Messagin g . You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sen t in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is ac tive. The second phone line is be ing used (network service). All calls to t he device are diverted to another number. If you have two phon e lines (network service), a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. indicates the connection has been lost. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible Text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is av ailable. The icons indicate that EGPRS is av aila ble in the network, but your device is not necessarily usin g EGPRS in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB connection is active.
Your Nokia N76 18 Power saver LED The display is switched off to save battery power after the screen saver is actived. A bl ue LED in the bottom of the cover display blinks to indicate that the device is powered on, but in the sleep mode. To turn the sleep mode on or off, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 99. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume l evel when you h ave an active call or are listening to a sound, press the volume keys. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because th e volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Opt ions > Activate loudsp eaker . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate handset . Keypad lock (keyguard) To lock the keys with the fold closed, press , then . To unlock the keys, press , then . To lock the keys with the fold open, press , then . To unlock the keys, press , then . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage so urce to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay speci al attention to volume levels.
Your Nokia N76 19 Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. To use a headset or headphones with a compatible remote control unit, for example, th e Nokia Audio Controller AD- 43, connect the unit to the connector in the device, then to the headset or headphones to the unit. Some headsets do not include a microphone. For phone calls, use such a headset with a remote control unit or the microphone of the device. When using certain headset enhancements, for example the Nokia Audio Controller AD-43, to adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key in the device. The Nokia Audio Controller AD-43 has multimedia vo lume controls that are used to adjust the volume only for music or video playback. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nok ia for use with th is device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this device. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Memory card tool Press , and s elect Tools > Memory . To back up information from the device memory to a compatible memory card (if available), select Option s > Back up phone memory . The device notifies you if the memory card does not have en ough fr ee space to create a back- up. To restore information from the compatible memory card to the device memory , select Options > Restore from card . When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others requir e formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must for mat the memory card before you can use it. To format a memory card, select Opt ions > Format memory card . Select Yes to confirm. File manager To browse files and folders in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted), press , and select To ols > File mgr. . The device memory view ( )
Your Nokia N76 20 opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ), if available. To mark several files, pres s and hold while yo u press , , or . To move or copy the files to a folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory from which to search. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Memory details . The amount of available free memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies yo u if the device or the memory card memory is low. To free device memory, tran sfer data to a compatible memory card (if av ailable) or to a compatib le PC. To remove data to free memory, use File manager to delete files you no longer n eed, or go to the re spective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Applications shown in App. manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis) of a pplications you have installed to a compatible memory card; first back up the installation files to a compati ble PC
Media applications 21 Media applications Music player Music player supports files fo rmats such as AAC, eAAC, eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Mus ic player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file format s. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. You can listen to music with the fold open or closed. If you are listening to music when a call comes in, the music pauses when you answer the call and resumes shortly after the end of the call. For how to add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer musicâÂÂ, p. 23. For more information about copyright protection, see âÂÂDigital rights managementâÂÂ, p. 95. Play music To play music with the fold open, do the following: 1 Press and se lect Music p layer . 2 In Music menu , select a category such as All songs or Albums . 3 Select the music you want to play. In Now playing , use the scroll key and the middle selection key to control p layback ⢠Press to play or pause a song. ⢠Press to rewind the tr ack or to s kip backwards. ⢠Press to fast forward the track or to skip forward. ⢠Press to stop playback. To play music with the fold closed, do the following: 1 In standby mode, press to enter Music menu . 2 Select the music you want to play, and press . In Now playing , use the quick cover keys to control playba ck: ⢠Press to play or pause a song. When you pause a song, a list of the tracks you are currently listeni ng to is displayed. ⢠Press to rewind the track or to skip backwards. ⢠Press to fast forward the tr ack or to skip forward. ⢠To switch between Now playing and Mus ic menu , press .
Media applications 22 Music menu To select more music to play in Now playing when the fold is open, select Options > Go to Music men u . The music menu shows the music available in the device and compati ble memory card (if ins erted). All songs lists all music. To view sorted songs, selec t Albums , Artists, Genres , or Composers . To view playlists, select Track lists . To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, select Opt ions > Refresh Music library . To open the view that displa ys the currently playing song , press and hold . To switch between Now playing and Music menu when the fold is closed, press . Use the quick cover and volume keys to select mo re music to play. Select Options to modify the basic play settings. Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Track lists . The following playlists appear automa tically: Most played tracks , Recent trac ks , and Recent additions . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Track list details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > Create playlist . 2 Enter a name for the play list, and select OK . 3 Select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, press . To hide t he song list, press . 4 When you have made your selections , select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more s ongs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add so ngs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Ad d to track list > Saved track list or New track list . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove from track list . This deletion d oes not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Option s > Reorder list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key.
Media applications 23 Music shop In the music shop (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music for downloading to your device. The variety, availabili ty, and appearance of music shop services may vary. You must have music shop settings an d valid internet connections in order to use this service. For more details, see âÂÂMusic shop settingsâÂÂ, p. 23 and âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p.106. Go to music sh op 1 In the Music menu , select Options > Go to Mus ic shop . 2 Select from the displayed opt ions to search, browse, or select ringing tones. Music shop settings The availability an d appearance of the mus ic shop settings may vary. T he settings may al so be predefined an d not editable. If the settings are not predefined, you may be asked to enter the following settings: Address âÂÂYou must define the web address of the music shop service. Default acc. pt. âÂÂSelect the access point to use when connecting to the music shop. User name âÂÂEnter your user name for the music shop. Password âÂÂEnter your password for the music shop. If User name and Password fields are left empty, you may have to enter them at login. In the music shop, you may be able to edit the setting s by selecting Options > Settings . Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatib le USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, in the Music menu , select Options > Refresh Music library The requirements of the PC for mu sic transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N76 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia Nseries PC Suite Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music:
Media applications 24 ⢠To view your device on a compatible PC as an external hard drive where you can tran sfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠T o use Nokia Musi c Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB ca ble and select PC Suite as the connection mode. To change the default USB co nnection mode, press , select Tools > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimized for transferring music files. For inform ation about transferring music with No kia Music Ma nager, see the Nokia Nseries PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player The functionality of the musi c synchronization may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and helps. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a compatible PC, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronizat ion if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a nam e th at is u sed as t he n ame of you r de vic e i n Wi ndo ws Media Player. To transfer manual s elections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected. 2 Drag the songs or albums to the list pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the files you want to synchronize and that there is enough fr ee memory on the device. Click Sta rt Sync. to s tart the synchronization. Automatic synchronizatio n To change the default file transfer op tion in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select yo ur device, and cl ick Set up Sy nc. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box.
Media applications 25 If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you co nnect your devi ce, the music libra ry in your device is automatically updated b ased on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists ha ve been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note that your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device memory and the compatible memory card of your device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information. The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Visual Radio Press , and select Ap plication s > Radio . Yo u can use the application as a traditio nal FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations, or with parallel visual information related to the radio program on the display, i f you tune to stations that of fer Visual Radio service . The Visual Radio service uses packet data (network service). You can listen to the FM radio wh ile using other applications. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may not support Visual Radio. You can normally make a ca ll or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. If you start mus ic player when the radio is on, the radio is muted. When music playback is paused or stopped, the radio starts to play again. When the fold is closed, use the quick cover keys and the volume and mode keys to control the FM radio. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device anten na. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and s elect Applications > Radio . To start a station search, select or , or press and hold the quick cover keys or . To c hange the frequency manually, select Options > Man ual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or , o r press the quick cover keys or . To adjust the volume, press the volume keys.
Media applications 26 To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspe aker . Warning: Liste n to music at a moderate leve l. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save sta tion . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your servic e provider. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual ser vice ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Re trieve to search for it in the station directory (network service). When the connection to the vi sual service is established, the display shows the current visual content. Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations when the fold is open, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, sel ect Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To switch between the list of your saved stations and listening to a saved station when the fold is closed, press . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Tip! You can add shortcuts to saved stations in the multimedia menu. See âÂÂMultimedia keyâÂÂ, p. 14. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂSelect whether a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start service âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a sa ved station that offers Visual Radio service. Access point âÂÂSelect the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio.
Media applications 27 Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are currently located in. This setting is di splayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. RealPlayer Press , and select Ap plication s > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play v ideo clips, or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4 or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all th e variations of file formats. In landscape view, use the quick cover keys to control the player. Play video clips 1 To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer recognizes an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device . RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a speci al message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and se ttingsâÂÂ, p. 70. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player auto matically repeat video clips after they fini sh playing Streaming âÂÂto select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings.
Media applications 28 Adobe Flash Player To view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices, press , and select Applications > Flash Player . Scroll to a flash file, and press . Nokia Lifeblog To start Lifeblog on your device, press , and select Lifeblog . Nokia Lifeblog is a combin atio n of softwa re for mobile phone and PC that keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your device. Nokia Lifeblog automatically keeps track of y our multimedia items and organizes your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and webl og posts into a chronology that you can browse, search, sh are, publish, and back up. For more information on Nokia Lifeblog, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Camera 29 Camera Your device has two cameras, a high-resolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the upper right corner of the main display (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 1600x1200 pixels using the main camera. The ima ge resolution in this guid e may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ideo folder in Gallery . The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extensio n ( sharing quality). See âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connectivity. You can also upload them to your compatible online album. See âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. Take pictures When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is low er than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a mo ment. To continue taking pictures, press . Fold-closed mode To take a picture using the co ver display as the viewfinder, do the following: 1 To activate the main camera, press and hold . If the camera is in Video mode , press . 2 To take a picture, press . Do not move the device befo re the image is saved. Fold-open mode To take a picture using the main display as the viewfinder, do the following: 1 Open the fold.
Camera 30 2 To activate the main camera, press . If the camera is in Video mode , select Switch to Image mode from the active toolbar. 3 To take a picture, press . Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out, use the volume keys in your device. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, in the main display, press or to scroll to items on the active toolbar. In the cover display, press to activate the toolbar, an d v olume keys to scroll to items. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. To free memory before taking a picture, select Options > Go to free me mory in the main display (only available if you have backed up images or video clips using Nokia Nseries PC Suite). See âÂÂFree memoryâÂÂ, p. 40. To activate the fr ont camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To leave the camera open in the background, and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press the capture key. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er (main display) displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The active toolbar, which you can scroll through before capturing the image to select diff erent items and settings (the active toolbar is not displayed during image capture). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. 3 The image resolution indicator indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Small , or MMS 0.3M - Small . 4 The image counter displays the estimated n umber of images you can capture usin g the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during image capture). 5 The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators show where images are saved.
Camera 31 Active toolbar Active toolbar provides you with shortcut s to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. If you are using the cover di splay as a viewfinder, press to display the active toolbar. Use the vo lume keys to scroll to the item you want. To select it, press . If you are using the main displa y as a viewfinder, scroll to the item you want. To select it, press . The available options vary de pending on the capture mode. You can also define whethe r the active toolbar is always visible on the display or activated by a key press. If you want the active toolbar to be visible before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . Only the capture mode indicator is shown on the displa y. To activate the toolbar, press . The toolbar is visible f or 5 seconds. Before taking a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to switch between the video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images only). See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 35. to activate the sequence mode (images only). See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 34. to select a color effect to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons change to reflect the current status of the setting. The available options vary de pending on the capture mode and view you are in. See also active toolbar options in âÂÂAfter taking a pictureâÂÂ, p. 31, âÂÂAfter recording a videoâÂÂ, p. 36, and âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 39 in Gallery . After taking a picture After you take a picture, there are several things you can do with the image using the active toolbar in t he main display (available only if Show captured image is set to On in the still image camera settings). ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete .
Camera 32 ⢠To send the image using multimedia, e-mail, Bluetooth connectivity, or upload it to your online album, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, se e âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58, and âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. This option is not available during an active call. You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (only available dur ing an active call). ⢠To tag images to the Print basket for later printing, select Add to Print Basket . ⢠To print the picture, select Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. ⢠To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press , or select Back . To use the picture as wallpaper in the active standby, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image f or a contact, select Set as contact call image . Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settin gs for the still image camera: Image setup and main settings. To a djust Image se tup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. T o change the main settings , select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Print 2M - Large (1600x120 0 resolution), Print 1M - Smal l (1152x864 resolu tion) or MMS 0.3M - Small (640x4 80 resolution) If you want to print the image, select Print 2M - Large . If you want to send it throug h e-mail , select Pri nt 1M - Smal l . To send the image through MMS, select MMS 0. 3M - Small . These resolutions are only ava ilable in the main camera. In the secondary camera, the resolution is always MMS 0.3M - Small . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. Default image name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured images. Extended digital zoom (main camera only)âÂÂSelect On to allow the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digit al zoom. If you want to limit the zoom to where the selec ted image quality is maintained, select Off .
Camera 33 Capture t one âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a picture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Rotate im age - Select whether you want the image to be rotated the right way up when you open it in the gallery. Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available for the still image camera: Automatic () , On () , R. eye redu. () , a n d Off () . To change the flash mode, in the ac tive toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Setup settingsâÂÂcolor and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add effects to your pictures or videos, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options: White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colors more accu rately. Exposure compensation (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Flash âÂÂSelect the desired flash mode. See âÂÂFlashâÂÂ, p. 33. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect fr om the list. Light sensitivity (images only)âÂÂSelect the light sensitiv ity of the camera. The darker the environment, the higher the light sens itivi ty should be. The screen display c hanges to match any settings you make, so that you see how the change affects the pictures or vid eos. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are camera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary camera, the settings in the main camera do not change. The setup settings do, however, transfer between the image and video modes. The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera.
Camera 34 If you select a new scene, the color and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. See âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. You can change the se tup settings afte r selecting a scene if needed . Scenes A scene helps you to find th e right color and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. Scenes are only availabl e in the main camera. In the active toolbar, select from the following options: Video scenes Automatic ( )(default) and Night () Image sc enes Auto () ( d e f a u l t ) , User defined () , Portrait () , Landscape () , Night () , a n d Night portrait () . When you take pictures, the default scene is Auto . To make your own scene suitabl e for a certain environment, in the ma in display, scroll t o User defined , and select Optio ns > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scen e. In the cover display, select Settings > User scene > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene . Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictures or more in a sequence (if enough memory available), in the active toolbar, select Switch to sequence mode to take six pictures in quick succession. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To take six pictures, press the capture key. To stop taking pictures, press Cancel . To take more than six pictures, pr ess and hold the capture key. To stop taking pictures, release the capture key. You can capture up to 100 images, depending on the available memory. After you take the pictures, they are sho wn in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press to open it. If you used a time period for taking pictures, the last taken picture is shown on the display. To view other pictures, press . You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. When using the self-timer, the maximum n umber of pictures is six. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, pr ess the capture ke y.
Camera 35 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in t he main camera . Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is ru nning. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off Self timer , in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip! In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Record videos To record videos using the cover display as the viewfinder (fold closed), do the following: 1 If the camera is in the Image mode , press to switch to Video mode . 2 Press to start record ing. The red record ico n is shown and a tone sounds, indicatin g that recording h as started. 3 To stop recording, press or select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder in Gallery .See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 38. The maximum length of the video is 60 minutes (if enough memory available). To record videos using the ma in display as the viewfinder (fold open), do the following: 1 If the camera is in the Imag e mode , select Switch to video mode from the active toolbar. 2 To start recordin g, pre ss . The r ed record icon is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3 To stop recording, press or select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved to Images & v ideo in Gallery . See âÂÂImages and video clipsâ p. 38. The maximum length of the video is 60 minutes (if enough memory available). To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if recordin g is set to pause and there are no keypresses within a minute. Select Continue to resume rec ording. To zoom in or out of the subj ect, press the volume keys on the side of the device. To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, use the scroll key to scroll through the active
Camera 36 toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂc olor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. To free memory before recording a video, select Option s > Go to free memory (only available if you have ba cked up images or video clips). See âÂÂFree memoryâÂÂ, p. 40. To activate the fr ont camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The audio mute on indicator. 3 The active toolbar, which you can scroll through befo re recording to select different items and se ttings (the toolbar is not displayed during record ing). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. 4 The total available video recording time. When you are recording , the current vide o length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 5 The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators show where videos are saved. 6 The video quality indicator indicates whether the quality of the video is High , Normal , or Sharing . 7 The video clip file type. To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Sh ow icons . Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the reco rding, the available record time, zo om bar when z ooming, and the selectio n keys. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar in the main display (available only if Show captured video is set to On in video settings): ⢠T o immediat ely play th e video cli p you just reco rded, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video clip using multimedia, e-mail, Bluetooth connectivity, or upload it to your online album, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58, and âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video c lips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an activ e call. Select Send to caller .
Camera 37 ⢠To record a new video clip, select New video . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High (best quality for long term usage and playback on a compatible TV or PC and handset), Normal (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using multimedia message). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select High , which has QVGA resolution (320x240) and the .mp4 file format. To send the video clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). The size of the video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in duration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Audio recording âÂÂSelect Off if you do not want to record sound. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you wan t the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the vid eo clip. Default video name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured video clips. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: device memory or memory card (if inserted). Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the d efault values to the camera settings .
Gallery 38 Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, press , and select Gallery . Tip! If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture in Gallery , press . To enter the Images & video folder main view, press again. View and browse files Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , Presentati ons , or All files , and press to open it.. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 40. Files stored on your compatibl e memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press . Vide o clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in RealPlayer , and music and sound clips in Music player . See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 27, and âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 21. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Move and copy > Copy to memory card or Move to memory card , or Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem. . To download sound clips into Gallery using the browser, in the Sound clips folder s, select Downld. sounds . Images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & video folder in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail at tachment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a rec eived image or video clip in Gallery or in a media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a co mpatible memory card (if inserted). Select Gallery > Images & video . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one,
Gallery 39 press or . To browse f iles in groups, press or . To switch between landscape and portrait modes, select Options > Rotate display . The content in the Images & v ideo folder is shown in the selected mode. When the imag e is opened, to zoom in an image, press the zoom keys on the side of your devi ce. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To rota te the se lected ima g e left or right, select Options > Rotate > Left or Right . To print your images on a co mpatible printer or to store them on a compatible memor y card (if in serted) for printing, select Options > Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. You can also tag images for later printing to the Print Basket in Gallery . See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 40. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Option s > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂEdit video c lipsâÂÂ, p. 43. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 42. To create custom video clips, select a video cli p or several clips in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 43. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 40. To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper. To delete an image or video clip, from the active toolbar, select Delete . See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 39. To switch from Gallery to the camera, press . Active toolbar In the Images & video folder, you can use active toolbar as a shortcut to select differen t tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to di fferent items, and select them by pressi ng . The avai lable options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a vi deo clip. Yo u can al so defin e whether the active toolbar is always visible on the display or activated by a keypress. If you want the active toolbar to be visible on the display, select Option s > Show icons . If you want the active toolbar to be visible only when you need it, select Option s > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar, press . Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip
Gallery 40 / to add or remov e an image from the Pr int Basket. See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 40. to view the images in the Print Basket to start a slide show of your images to delete the selec ted image or video clip to print the viewed image to reduce the resolution of the selected image to fr ee memory for new images. See âÂÂFree me mo ryâÂÂ, p. 40. The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Print Basket You can tag images to the Print Basket, and print them later with a compatible printer or in a compatible printing kiosk, if available. See âÂÂIma ge printâÂÂ, p. 41. The tagged images are indicated with in the Images & video folder and albums. To tag an image for la ter printing, sele ct an image, and Add to Print Basket from the active toolbar. To view the images in the Print Basket, select View Print Basket from the active toolbar, or select from the Images & vide o folder (available only when you have added pictures to the Print Basket). To remove an image from the Print Basket, select an image in the Images & video folder or in an album, and Remove from print from the active toolbar. Albums With albums you can conven ie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, select Images & video > Options > Albums > View albums . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or vid eo clip. The added pictures and video clips are not deleted from the Images & video folder. To remove a file from an album, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gal lery . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New albu m . Free memory To reduce the resolution and file size of images saved in Gallery and free memory for new pictures, select Options > Shrink . To back up the images first, copy them
Gallery 41 to a compatible PC or other location. Selecting Shrink reduces the resolution of a n image to 640x480. To increase free memory space after you have copied items to other locations or devices, select Options > Free memory . You can browse a list of files you have copied. To remove a copied file from Gallery , select Options > Delete . Image print To print images with Image print , select the image you want to print, and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card (if av ailable). You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. To print to a printer compatib le with PictBridge, connect the data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data ca ble mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. Th e printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible with PictBridge using a compatible USB data cable, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Op tions > Settings > Default printer . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layo uts. To change the layout, press or to browse through the available layout s for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printe r .
Gallery 42 To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online , you can order prints of images online directly to your home, or to a store where you can pick them up. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online , you must have at least one printing service configuration file in stalled. The files can be obtained from printing serv ice providers that support Print online . For more information on the application, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Online sharing With Online share , you can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depe nding on the servic e provid er. To use Online share , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service provider. Contact your servic e provider for details on subscribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see the product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. For more information on the application, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Options > Apply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit optio ns indicated by smal l icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, se lect Options > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, s elect Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual ,
Gallery 43 a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first select ed area, select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you selected a predefined as pect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cr opped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press . To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . Reduce redness To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Optio ns > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Useful shortcuts Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠T o view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in o r out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, press , , , or . Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. You can use Movie dir ector to create custom video clips. Select the video clips and images you want to create a muvee with and select Options > Edit > Create mu vee . See âÂÂMovie directorâÂÂ, p. 44. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, send the clip using B luetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 59. You can als o transfer your vide os to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, a compatible USB cable, or by using a compatible memory card reader enhancement. Slide show In the active toolbar, selec t Slide show ( ) to view a slide show of images in full screen. The slide show starts from the selected file . Select from the following:
Gallery 44 Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resu me the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, press (previous) or (next) (available only when Zoom and pan is off). To adjust the tempo of t he slide show, before starting the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between slides . To make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let the gallery ra ndomly zoom in and out in the images, select Z oom and pan . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Music or Track . To decrease or increase the volume, use the volume keys in your device. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. SV G images maintain their appearance when prin ted or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, select Presentations , scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Optio ns > Pause . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise, press or . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press or . To switch between full screen and normal screen, press . Movie director To create muvees, press , and select Gallery , images and videos, and Options > Edit > Create muvee . A muvee is a short, edited video clip that can contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie dire ctor uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. In a custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an openi ng and closing message. You can send muvees in a multimedia message. A muvee can be save d in Gallery in .3gp file format. Create a quick muvee 1 In Gallery , select images and videos for the muvee, and Options > Edit > Create muv ee . The style selection view opens. 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. 3 Select Options > Create muvee .
Gallery 45 Create a custom muvee 1 In Gallery , select images and videos for the muvee, an d Options > Edit > Create mu vee . The style selection view opens. 2 Scroll to the desired style, and select Options > Customise . 3 Reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee in Videos & images or Music . In Videos & images , you can define the order in which the files are played in the muvee. To select the file you want to move, press . Then scroll to the file below which you want to place the marked file, and press . To add or remove images an d videos from the muvee, select Options > Add/Remove . To add albums and their cont ent to the muvee, in the image or video cl ip list view, select Options > Albums . To cut the video clips, In Videos & images , select Options > Select contents . See âÂÂSelect contentâÂÂ, p. 45. In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. In Lengt h , you can define the length of the muvee. Select from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimize the length of the muvee for sending in a multimedia mess age Auto-select âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip User defined âÂÂto define the length of the muvee 4 Select Options > Create muvee . The preview view opens. 5 To preview the custom muvee be fore saving it, select Options > Play . 6 To save the muvee, select Opti ons > Save . To create a new custom muve e by using the same style settings, se lect Opti ons > Recreate . Select content To edit the selected video clips, in the Videos & images folder, select Options > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. In the slide, green indicates included, red indicates excluded, and grey indicates neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, a nd select Options > Include . To exclude a part, select Option s > Exclude . To exclude a shot, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a certain part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Mark as neutral . To randomly includ e or exclude parts of the clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral .
Gallery 46 Settings In the style selection view, sele ct Options > Customise > Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees. Select Automatic to use the optimal resolution based on the number and length of the video clips you have selected. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Personalize your device 47 Personalize your device To personalize your device, select from the following: ⢠To use t he standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. ⢠To change the standby mode background image o r what is shown in the screen saver, see âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 48. ⢠To change t he look of the cover display, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 49. ⢠To customize the ringing tone s, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 47 and âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 90. ⢠To change the shortcuts as signed for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 99. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digi tal . ⢠To ch ange the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Personalisation > Display > Welcome note / logo . ⢠T o change the main menu view, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid or List . ⢠To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select Options > Icon animation > On . ⢠To r earrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that you use more of ten into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, envir onments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Activate . You can also change the profile by pressing in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! To switch between th e general and silent profiles, press and hold . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with .
Personalize your device 48 In the tones list, the Download sounds link (network service) opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken when your device rings, select Options > Personalise , and set Say caller's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, s elect Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profil e, the connecti on to the wireless network is turned off, as in dicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If yo u try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. When the Offline pr ofile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Ca lls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To ma ke calls, yo u must firs t activate t he phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. You can also use Blu etooth connectivity while in the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. To leave the Offline profile, press the power key, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (provid ing there is sufficient signa l strength). Change the look of your device To change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . To change the theme that is us ed for all the applications in your device, select Themes > General . To change the theme of a certain application, in the main view, select an application. To preview a theme befor e activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card
Personalize your device 49 without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. To change the layout of the main menu, select Themes > Menu view . To open a browser connection and download mo re themes, in General or Menu view , select Download themes (network service). Imp ortant: Use only services that y ou trust and that offer adequate security and protecti on against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper and power saver of the current theme, select Themes > Wallpaper to change the background image on the display for the active standby mode. See also âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ, p. 98 for power saver time-out setting. Cover display To change the look of the cover display, press and select Tools > Themes > Cover personalis. , and from the following: Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. Screen saver âÂÂSelect an image or animation to use as a screen saver on the cover display and how long it is displayed. When you select an image to use as wallpaper or a screen saver, a cropping frame the size of the cover disp lay is shown on top of the image. You can zoom and rotate the area of the image. Scroll to move the frame around the display. To use the area inside the frame, select Options > Set as wallpaper or Set as screen saver . You cannot use a copyright-protected image as wallpaper or screen saver. Closing animation âÂÂSelect a short animation to play when you close the cover. Closing tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you close the cover. Opening tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you open the cover and the device is in the standby mode. Active standby mode The active standby display sh ows application shortcut s, and events from applications such a s calendar and playe r. To switch the active standb y on or off, press , and select To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby .
Personalize your device 50 Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applicationsâ shortcuts, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby apps. . Some shortcuts may be fixed , and you cannot change them.
Web browser 51 Web browser Press , and select Web ( network service). Shortcut: To start the web browser, press and hold in the standby mode. With the web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mob ile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup lang uage (WML ). With Web , you can zoom in and out on a page, use Mini Map and page overview to navigate on pages, read web feeds and blogs, bookmark web pages, and download content. Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. To use the web browser, you need an access point to connect to internet. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or se rver is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested r esource is stored) is secure. The service provider secure s the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security c ertifica t es may be re quired for some serv ices, such as banking services. You are notifie d if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertifi cate managementâÂÂ, p. 101 for mor e information on the certificates and certifi cate details. Bookmarks view The bookmarks view allows you to select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Auto. Bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ).
Web browser 52 indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses a s bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also sa ve addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send save d bookmarks. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third-party sites through your device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with No kia, and Nokia does not end orse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take prec au tions for sec urity or conten t. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookma rk, such as the tit le, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also enter other browser folders. The web browser allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. The web browser also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. Bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web Feeds , you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organization web pages, personal weblogs, online communities that offer latest headlines, an d article summa ries. Web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies. Browse the web offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. With Web , you can view web pages as they are originally designed. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter th e address in the field ( ). Then press . Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load images and sounds > No . Tip! To ret urn to the standby mode with the browse r open in the background, press twice or . To return to the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Important: Use only serv ices that you trust and that
Web browser 53 To open links and make selections, press . To open a link in a new window, select Options > Window > Link in new window . To enter a new web page addres s you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip! To visit a web page saved as bookmark in the bookmarks view, while brow sing, press and select a bookmark. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of th e current page as boo kmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To use Visual history to view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (av ailable if History list is set on in the browser settings) or Options > Navigation options > History . To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options > Tools > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or compatible memory card (if inserted), and browse them when offline. You can also grou p the pages into folders. To access the pages later, in the bookmarks view, select Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currentl y open pa ge, sel ect Opt ions > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . Shortcuts while browsing ⢠Press to open your bookmarks. ⢠Press to search for keyw ords in the current page. ⢠Press to return to the previous page. ⢠Press to list all open windows. ⢠Press to close the current window if two or more windows are open. ⢠Press to show the page overview of the current page. Press ag ain to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. ⢠Press to enter a new web address. ⢠Press to go to the start page. ⢠Press or to zo om the page in or out. To switch between portrait and landscape views, select Options > Rotate screen . Text Search To search for keywords within the current web page, select Options > Find > Text , and enter a keyword. To go to the
Web browser 54 previous match, press . To go to the next match, press . Tip! To search for keywords within the page, press . Browser toolbar With the toolbar, you can select most fr equently used features in the browser. To open the toolbar, press on an empty spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, press or , To select a feature, press . In the toolbar, select from the following: Frequently used links to view a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. Page overview to view the overview of the curr ent web page. Find to search for keywords within the current page. Reload to refresh the page. Subscribe (if available) to view a list of available web feeds on the current web pa ge, and subscribe to a web feed. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are hand le d by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo or an .mp3 f ile can be saved in Gallery . Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified TM testing. 1 To download the item, select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ). 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To also view the list, select Optio ns > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Mini Map Mini Map helps you to navigate on web pages that contain large amount of informat ion. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview
Web browser 55 of the web page you browse. To scroll in Mini Map , press , , , or . When you find the desired location, stop scrolling, and Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini Map > On . Page overview When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use page overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press . To find the desired spot on the page, press , , , or . Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are widely used by the weblog community and ne ws organizations to share the latest entry headlines or full text, for example, recent news in the form of news fe eds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and AT OM technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The web browser automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web fee d, select Options > Subscribe , or click on the li nk. To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it, and Options > Refr esh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 56. End connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; or to end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Pressing does not end the connection but takes the browser to the background. To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookies . To clear the dat a you entered for dif ferent form s on the web pages you visited, select Options > Clear privacy data > Form passwo rd data . To clear the information stor e d about the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Options > Clear privacy data > History .
Web browser 56 Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the de vice. A cache is a memory loca tion that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation o r services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the followi ng: General settings Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 105. Some or a ll access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Mini Map âÂÂSet Mi ni Map on or off. See âÂÂMini MapâÂÂ, p. 54. History list âÂÂWhile browsing, to use the selection key Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show security notifications. Java/ECMA script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of script s. Page settings Load images and sounds âÂÂSelect whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select No , to load images or objects l ater during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂSelect between Full screen and the normal view with the Options list. Default encodin g âÂÂIf text charac ters are not s hown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page. Font size âÂÂDefine the font size that is used fo r web pages. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂIf you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Privacy settings Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue savin g the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. Bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder .
Web browser 57 Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used next time the page is entered, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the re ceiving and s ending of cookies. Serial no. sending âÂÂTo send the serial number of your device as your user identifi cation when requested by web services, select On (if avail able). Web feeds settings Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically or not, and how often you want to update them. Setting the application to retrieve web feeds automa tically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Acc. point fo r auto-update (only av ailable when Automatic updates is on)âÂÂSelect the desired access point for updating.
Connections 58 Connections Connection manager Data connections Press , and select Tools > Con n. mgr. > Act ive data connections . In the active connections view, you can see the open data connections: data calls ( ), and packet data connections ( or ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depend ing on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with wireless Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobi le phones, comp uters, and enhancem ents such a s headsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, musi c and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to trans fer files); connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image p rint . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves , your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each other, but the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as wall s or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant w ith Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following prof iles: Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Generic A ccess Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Prof ile, Object Push Profile, Service Discovery Application Pr ofi le, Serial Port Profile. To ensure interoperability betw een other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device.
Connections 59 There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Blue tooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When yo u open the application for the firs t time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Blueto oth âÂÂTo connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. To switch off Bl uetooth connectivity, select Off . My phone's vi sibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the vis ibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . T o hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name shown to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On . For more information, see âÂÂRemote SIM modeâÂÂ, p. 61. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visi bility > Hidden . I n this way, you can better cont rol who can find your device with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headse t, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. For Bluetooth connectivity indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 17.
Connections 60 Tip! To send text using Bluetoot h connectivity, open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology within range start to appear on the display. Device icons: computer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrup t the search, sele ct Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible de vices and view your paired devices, in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, cr eate your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology within range start to appear on the display. 2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enh ancement, and select Opt ions > Connect . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time.
Connections 61 To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to c ancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages received through Bluetooth co nnectivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 69. Remote SIM mode To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 59. Before the mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor ar ea, and you cannot use SIM card services or feat ures requiring ce llular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connected enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receiv e calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, excep t to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls from your devi ce, you must first l eave the r emote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exi t remote SIM mode . USB Press , and s elect Tools > USB . To have the device ask the purpose of the USB cable connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following: Media player âÂÂto synchronize music with Windows Media Player. See âÂÂMusic transfer with Windows Media PlayerâÂÂ, p. 24.
Connections 62 PC Suite âÂÂto use to use the data cable connection for the Nokia Nseries PC Suite Data transfer â to transfer data be tween your device and a compatible PC Image pr int âÂÂto print images on a comp atible printer. See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. PC connections You can use your device with a var iety of compatible PC connectivity and data communi cations applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from th e PC to synchronize with your device. Synchronization Sync enables you to synchronize your notes, calendar , text messages, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronizat ion settings in a special message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. A synchronizat ion profile contains the necessary setting s to synchroni ze data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible device. 1 Press , and select Tools > Sync . 2 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronization bef ore it finishes, select Cancel . Device manager To connect t o a server and receive configuration settings for your device, to create new server profiles, or to view and manage existing server pr ofiles, press , and select Tools > Device mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your serv ice providers and company information management department. These configuration settings may i nclude connect ion and other settings used by different applications in your device. Scroll to a server profile, and select Options and from the following: Start configuration âÂÂto connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device New server profile âÂÂto create a server profile To delete a server profile, scroll to it, and press .
Download! 63 Download! Download! (network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device. With Download! you can discover, prev iew, buy, download, and upgrade content, services, and applications that work with your Nokia N76. Games, ringing tones, wallpapers, applications, and much more are right at hand. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by different service providers. The available content depends on your service provider. Press , and select Download! . Download! uses your network services to access the most up-to-date content. For info rmation on addition al items available through Download! , contact your service provider or the supplier or manufacturer of the item. Download! receives ongoing updates, bringing you the latest co ntent your se rvice prov ider of fers for your device. To update the content in Download! manually, select Options > Refresh list . To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, for example, to view only the items you use frequently, select Options > Hide . To make all the hidden items visible again, select Options > Show all . To buy the selected item in the main view or in a folder or catalog, select Options > Buy . A submenu opens, where you can sel ect the ve rsion of the item and view price information. The available options depend on the service provid er. To download an item that is free of charge, select Options > Get . Settings for Download! The application updates your device with the most recent content available from your service provider and other available channels. To change the settings, select Options > Settings and from the foll owing: Access point âÂÂTo select which access point is used t o connect to the service providerâÂÂs server and whether to have the device to ask for the access point every time you use. Automatic open âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the content or application to be opened automatically after downloading. Preview confirmation âÂÂSelect No if you want to automatically download a preview of the content or
Download! 64 application. Select Yes if you want to be asked separately each time before downloading a preview. Buy confirmation âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to be asked for confirmation before buying co ntent or an application. If you select No the buying process starts immediately after you select the option Buy . After you complete the settings, select Back .
Time management 65 Time management Clock Press , and select Ap plication s > Clock . To view your active and inactive alarms, press . To set a new alar m, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is a ctive, is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . To stop the alar m for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the dev ice asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an ala rm, select Applications > Clock > Options > Remove alarm . To change clock sett ings, selec t Applications > Cl ock > Options > Settings > Ti me or Date , Clock type , or Clo ck alarm tone . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone informa tio n to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . World clock To open the world clock view, select Clock , and press twice. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add ci ties to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a ma ximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, sc roll to a city, and select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the ti me in your device is changed according to th e city selec ted. Check that the ti me is correct and match es your time zone. Calendar Press and se lect Calendar . To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Options > New entry and one of the following: 1 Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Meeting request âÂÂto create and send a new meeting request. You need to have a mailbox set up for sending requests. See âÂÂMailboxâÂÂ, p. 71. Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day
Time management 66 Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fiel ds. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm time and Alarm date . To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to Subject . In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar alarms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . You can synchronize your ca lendar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired sy nchronisation option. Calendar views Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. To go to a cert ain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press . To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, selec t Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. To modify the calendar, select Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title . Manage your calendar entries To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To m a r k a t a s k a s c o m pl e t e d, s c r ol l t o it i n t he t o - do v i e w , and select Opt ions > Mark as done .
Messaging 67 Messaging Press , and select Me ssaging (n etwork service). Only device s that have compatible f eatures can re ceive and display multimedia mess ages. Th e appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. To create a new message, select New me ssage . Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, exc ept e-mail and ce ll broadcast messages, are stored her e. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates fo lder. You ca n also create and save your own template s. Mailbox âÂÂConnect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last me ssages that hav e been sent, excluding messages sent usin g Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 76. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter a nd send se rvice re quests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands fo r network services, to your service pro vider, select Option s > Service command in the main view of Messaging . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . Cell broadcast messages cann ot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception.
Messaging 68 Text modes ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. To switch between the lette r and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To insert a number in the le tter mode, press and hold the desired number key. is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when using predictive text input. With predictive text, you ca n enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text in put is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. To activate predictive text input, press , and select Predictive text on . Tip! To turn predictive text input on or off, quickly press twice. Write and send messages Before you can create a mu ltimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂE-mail settingsâÂÂ, p . 71 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it ca n be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and from the following: Text message âÂÂto send a text message Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) Audio message âÂÂto send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of a multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields .
Messaging 69 4 In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select Options > Insert or Insert object > Templa te . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip. To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Op tions > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Note: Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Yo ur devi ce may not indicate whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details abou t messaging ser vices, co ntact your service provider. Your device supports the sendin g of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and chara cters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exc eed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia mess age. Tip! You can combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia mes sage, and select Options > Create presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 73. InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia me ssage, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectiv ity.
Messaging 70 When you receive a message, and 1 new me ssage are displayed in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show . I f the fold is closed and the message cannot appear on the cover, Open fold to view message is displayed. Open the cov er to view the message. When the fold is open, scroll to Inbox , and press to open it. To reply to a received message, selec t Options > Reply . When the fold is closed and you h ave more than one unread message, select Show to open Inbox . Use the volume and quick cover keys to navigate in the Inbox folder and when viewing messages. Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To start a packet data connection to re trieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receive many kin ds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider or company information manage ment department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Op tions and the corresponding option. Web service messages Web service messages ar e noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may c ontain a text message or a link. For availability and subscriptio n, contact your service provider.
Messaging 71 Mailbox E-mail settings Tip! Use Settings Wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Sett. wizard . To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. If you select Mailbox in the Messagin g main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prom pted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox gu ide, sele ct Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). When you create a new mailbox , the name you gi ve to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main vie w. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, sele ct Yes . When you view message s online, y ou are c ontinuo usly conne cted to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the messaging main view or Opti ons > Create message > E- mail in your mailbox. See âÂÂWrite and send messagesâÂÂ, p. 68. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when openin g messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following: New âÂÂto retrieve all new messages Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 If you want to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect .
Messaging 72 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and sele ct the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; s elect Options > Retri eve . Retrieve e-mail messages auto matically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E- mail settings > Automatic retrieval . For more information, se e âÂÂAutomat ic retrievalâÂÂ, p. 76. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e- mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-ma il headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the mes sage content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone and server . To cancel deleting a n e-mai l from the device and server, scroll to a n e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view S IM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens.
Messaging 73 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Follow the instruct ions given by your service provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select M essaging > Optio ns > Settin gs > Text message and from the following: Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Message centre in use âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when avail able, select Reduced support . Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network sends delivery report s on your mess ages (netwo rk service). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂContact your service provider to learn if your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Preferred connect ion âÂÂSelect the connection to be used. Reply via same centre âÂÂSelect whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > Multim edia mes sage and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from se nding messages th at may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use âÂÂSelect which access point is used a s the preferred connection.
Messaging 74 Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automa tically in your home cellular network , select Auto in ho me netw. . Outside your home cellular n etwork, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message center. Outside your h ome cellular network, se nding and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Mult imedia r etriev al > Always automatic , your device automatically makes an ac tive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny report sending âÂÂSelect whether you want to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settin gs > E-mail . To select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the following settings: Connection se ttings , User settings, Re trieval settings , and Automatic retrieval . To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, scroll to it, and press . To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox . Connection sett ings To edit the settings for the e -mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server âÂÂEnter th e IP addr ess or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an internet access p oint (IAP). See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106.
Messaging 75 Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol th at your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The opt ions are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. Security (ports) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the fol lowing: My e-mail addres s âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server âÂÂEnter th e IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service pro vider for mo re info rmation. The settings for User n ame , Password, Access point in use , Security (ports) , a nd Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e -mail . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name . Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supp orts this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the devi ce to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signatur e âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail alerts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Partially (kB) (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the f older path for folde rs to be subscribed.
Messaging 76 Folder su bscriptio ns (for IMAP4 only)â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval E-mail notifi cations âÂÂTo auto matically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw. . E-mail re trieval âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. . Define when and how often the messages are r etrieved. E-mail notifi cations and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmission charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Select whether yo u want to receive service messag es. If you wa nt to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Autom atically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider . Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast and from the following: Reception âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new topic numb ers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settin gs > Other and from the following: Save sent me ssages âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Se nt folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted.
Messaging 77 Memory in use âÂÂIf a compatible memory card is ins erted in the device, select the memory wher e you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . IMâÂÂinstant messaging Press , and select Ap plication s > IM . Instant messaging (network s ervice) allows you to converse with other people using instant mess ages and join discussion forums (IM gr oups) with specific topics. Various service providers main tain compatible IM servers that you can log in to after yo u register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their sup port of features. Before you can use in stant messaging, you must define the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. For more information on instant messaging, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Make calls 78 Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twic e for the character (replaces the international a ccess code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. Closing the fold does not end an active voice call. To adjust the volume during a call, use the volume keys on the side of your device. If you have set the vo lume to Mute , select Unmute first. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. M atching contacts are listed. To call, press . You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before you can make a call this way. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 89. To call a recently dialed numb er in the standby mode, press . Scroll to the number, and press . To send an image or a video cli p in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networ ks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTM F string or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. You can add DTMF ton es to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Options > Hold . To switch between the active and the held c all, select Optio ns > Swap . To connect the active and held calls and drop yourself from the line, sele ct Op tions > Tran sfer . Tip! When you have only one active voice c all, to put the call on hold, press . To activate the call, press again. During an active call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Activate loudspeaker . If you
Make calls 79 have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate hand sfree . To switch back to the handset, select Op tions > Activate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video ma ilbox (network services, video mailbox available only in th e UMTS network), press and hold in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 104, and âÂÂVideo callsâÂÂ, p. 80. To change the phone number of your voice or video mai lbox, press , and select To ols > all mail bo x , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your wi reless service provider), and select OK . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participa nt in the conference ca ll, sele ct Optio ns > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still continue th e conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the partic ipant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conf eren ce call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialin g, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > C all > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Speed dial . C
Make calls 80 Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assig n . is reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card, scroll to the number with a voice tag, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely sole ly upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is a ttached, pres s and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. Af ter a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialing. If several numbers are saved un der the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business), Telephone, Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call (network s ervice), you can see a real-time, two-way video be tween you and the recipient
Make calls 81 of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video c all, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to vide o call services, contact your wireless service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a comp atible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cann ot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video send ing from your device. To send a still image instead, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 103. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video c all, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a cont act. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera inside the fold is us ed by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful ( for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a no rmal call or send a text o r multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video s ending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Option s > Enable or Disabl e > Sending video , Sending audio or Sending aud. & video . To zoom in or out your own image, press or . To switch the places of th e sent video images on the display, select Options > Change image order . To route the audio to a compat ible headset with Bluetooth connectivit y attached t o your device, select Options > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume keys on the side of the device. To use the main camera for sending video, select Options > Use main came ra . To switch back to the secondary camera , select Options > Use secondary camera .
Make calls 82 To end the video call, press . Video sharing Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate Video sharing . If you do not want to use the loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on the UMTS network availability. Contact your servi ce provider for more information on the serv ice and network availability, and fees associ ated with using this service. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 82. ⢠E nsure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 82. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start Video shari ng if you are not within UMTS network coverage. ⢠E nsure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cove rage, or does not hav e Video sharing installed or person-to- person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) c onnec tion. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Ask your service provider fo r the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters . If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on the personâÂÂs contact card. Open Contacts from your device main menu, and open the contact card (or start a new card for that pe rson). Se lect Options > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the format
Make calls 83 username@domainname (you can use a n IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know a SIP address for the contact, you can also use the phone number of the r ecipient including the country code, for example 358, to share video (if supported by the wireless service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service provider to es tablish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 105. Share live video or video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Option s > Share video > Live video . To share a video clip, select Options > Share video > Recorded clip . A list of video clips saved on the device memory or compatible memory card opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 2 If you share live video, your device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If you share a video clip, select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be converted for sharing . Continue ? appears. Select OK . If the contact informa tion of the recipient is saved in Contacts , and the contact has se veral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is no t available, enter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue t o r e s u m e s h a r i n g . T o f a s t f o r w a r d o r r e w i n d the video clip, press or . To play the clip again, press Play . 5 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save the live video you shared, select Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query. The shared video is saved in the Images & video folder in Gallery . If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view and continue sharing, in the active standby
Make calls 84 mode, select Options > Continue . See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. Accept an invitation When someone sends yo u a share invi tation, an invi tation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Accept âÂÂto activate the sharing session. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the end key to d ecline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you are receiving a video clip, to mute the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press . If Answer if fold opened is set to Yes in settings, open the fold. To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press . If you have activated the Call divert > If busy func tion to divert calls, declinin g an incomi ng call al so divert s the cal l. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 104. When you sele ct Silence to mute the ringing tone of the incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 103. Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Press t o answer the video call. Allow video image to be s en t to ca ll er ? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear t h e sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen
Make calls 85 with a still image captured by the camera in your device, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 103. To end the video call, press . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another ca ll in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > C all waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two call s, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on ho ld with an active ca ll and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Log To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed voice calls, press , and select Applications > Log > Recent calls . The device register s missed and received calls only if the netw ork supports these functions, the device is switched on, an d within the network service area. To clear all recent cal l lists, select Options > Cle ar recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to th e event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Applications > Log > Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, roundin g off for billing, and so forth . To clear call duration timers, select Optio ns > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select Applications > Log > Packet data . For exam ple, you may be charged for your packet data connections by t he amount of data sent and received.
Make calls 86 Monitor all communication events Icons in Log are as follows: Incom ing Outgoing Missed communica tion events To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select Applications > Log , and press to open the general log. Su be v en ts , s u ch a s a te x t m e ss ag e s e nt in m or e t h an o ne part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add an unknown phon e number from Log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, an d messaging delivery reports permanentl y, select Optio ns > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from the log, press . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Lo g duration . If you selec t No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messag ing delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip! In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy number . To view from th e packet data counter how much data is transferred and how long a certa in packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoi ng event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details . Push to talk Press , and select Tools > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service implemen ted over a GSM/GPRS network. Push to talk provides di rect voice communication connected with the push of a key. Use push t o talk to have a conversation with one person or with a group of people. Before you can use push to talk, you must define the push-to-talk access point an d push-to-talk settings. You may receive the setting s in a sp ecial text message from the service provider that offers t he push-to-talk service. You can also use the Sett. wizard application for configuration, if supported by your service provider. In push-to-talk communication , one perso n talks while the others listen through the built-in loudspeaker. Spe akers take turns responding to ea ch other. Because o nly one group member can talk at any time, the maximum duration
Make calls 87 of a speech turn is limited. The maximum duration is usually set to 30 seconds. For details of the spe ech turn duration for your network, cont act your servic e provider. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Phone calls always take pr iority over push-to-talk activities. For more inform ation on push to talk, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Contacts (phonebook) 88 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Con tacts . In Con tacts you can save and update contact informatio n, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing to ne or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You ca n also create cont act groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. You ca n add received cont act information (business c ards) to contacts. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Co ntact info rmat ion can only be sent to or received from com patible devices. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Cont acts info . Save and edit names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit c ontact ca rds in Contacts , scroll to the conta ct card you want to edit, and select Optio ns > Edit . You can also search for the des ired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip! To add and edit contact cards, you can als o use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nok ia Nseries PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag assi gned to the contact, select a contact card and Options > Play voice tag . See âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 80. To send contact information, select the ca rd you want to send and Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bl uetooth . See âÂÂMessagi ngâÂÂ, p. 67 and âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 59. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group: (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 90. To check to which groups a contact belong s, select the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a contact card in Cont acts , select a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete.
Contacts (phonebook) 89 Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses to a con tact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialing. 1 In the address book, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you wa nt to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory , the names you want to copy, and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts , selec t the names you want to copy an d Options > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia Nseries PC Sui te. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and s elect Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM direc tory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls from y our device to selected phone numbers, select Options > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and d eactivate fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When yo u use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when send ing text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 90 When fixed dialing is activated, c alls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the se lected group. You can also use a video clip as a ri nging tone. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognizes it). To remove t he ringin g tone, s elect Default tone from the list of ring ing tones. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4 Select the group, and Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want t o add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, select th e group you want to modify . 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group.
Office 91 Office Calculator Press , and select Of fice > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Adobe Reader With Adobe Reader, you can read .pdf docu ments on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for .pdf document content on handsets and ot her mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions. To open documents, press , and select Of fice > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . Use File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on a compatible memory card (if inserted). More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com. To share questions, suggestions, and information about the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://a dobe.com/support/forums/ main.html. Converter To convert measures fr om one unit to another, press , and select Office > Converter . Converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Unit field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value yo u want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value.
Office 92 Set base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates be cause all previously set exchange rates are cleared. Notes To write notes in .txt format, press , and select Office > Notes . Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Office > Recorder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Wireless Keyboard To set up a compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth human interface de vices (HID) profil e for use with your device, use the Wireless keybd. application. The keyboard enables you to enter text in comfort, using the full QWERTY layout, for text messages, e-mail, and calendar entries. 1 Activate Bluetooth connectivity on your device. 2 Switch on the keyboard. 3 Press , and select Office > Wireless keybd. . 4 Select Options > Find keyboard to s tart searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. 5 Select the keyboard from th e list, and press to start the connection. 6 To pair the keyboard with yo ur device, enter a pa sscode of your choice (1 to 9 dig its) on the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. To enter the digits of the passcode, you may need to press the Fn key first. 7 If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it fro m a list on your device. 8 When the name of the keyboard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the green indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide.
Tools 93 Tools Application manager Press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications and software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis or .sisx exten sion. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N76. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N76-1. Installa tion files may be t ransf erred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). Install applications and software indicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fully installed, and that the application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trus ted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing . Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, a nd the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . To display the security cert ificate details of the application, in Cer tificates , select View details . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 101. ⢠If you instal l a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the orig inal application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy.
Tools 94 ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the ap plication, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 To locate an ins tallation file, press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a compat ible memo ry card (if inserted) in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installat ion file. 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate it in the menu, and press . If the application does not have a default f older defined, it is installed in the Applic ations fo lder. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the de vi ce to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Nseries PC Su ite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, th en use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. See âÂÂFile managerâÂÂ, p. 19. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that s oftware. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package
Tools 95 may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installat ion âÂÂSelect whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications may re quire a message to be sent or a network connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Open to change settings related to that spec ific application. Digital rights management Content owners may use differ ent types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including cop yrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may as k that such DRM so ftware's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated acti vation key that defi nes your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Nseries PC Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer th e activation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You ma y also need to restore the activation keys in case th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You ma y also lose the activati on keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may
Tools 96 limit your ability to use the sa me cont ent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected conten t can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view the digital rights activation keys stored in your device, press , and select Tools > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose validity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exc eeded or there is a protected media file in the device b ut no connected activation k ey. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an invalid acti vation key and Options > Get new key . Activation keys cann ot be updated if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 70. To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the fil e, scroll to an activation key, and press . Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 80. To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications and profiles, you must open the Voice comm. application and its Pro files fol der. Press , and select Tools > Voice comm. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To use enhanced voice commands when the fold is closed, press and hold the forward key. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Opt ions > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, a bbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, select Option s > Playback . To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiz er that plays recognized voice tags and commands in the selected device language, select S ynthesise r > Off . To reset voice
Tools 97 recognition learning, for exampl e, when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . Positioning Press , and select Ap plication s > GPS data or Landmarks . The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintenance. The accuracy of loca tion data ca n be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States go vernment and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civ il GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availa bili ty and quality of GPS signals may be affected by yo ur location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. GPS should only be used as a navigation aid. It should not be used for precise location measurement and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With Landmarks , you can save and view the position information of specifc locations in your device. With GPS data , you can access route guidance information to a selected destination, position info rmation about your current location, and travelin g information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximate duration of travel. Landmarks and GPS data may be network based (network service) or they may require that you use a compatible GPS receiver. For more information on Landmarks and GPS data , see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e.
Settings 98 Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to General , Phone , Connection , or Applications , and press . Scroll to a setting or setting group you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General To edit the general settings of your device or restore the original default device se ttings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation , Date and time , Cover d isplay , En hancement , Security , Factory settings , or Positioning . For Date and time , see âÂÂClockâÂÂ, p. 65. Personalisation To edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functionality of your device, press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Gen eral > Personalisation . Tones allows you to change the tones of ca lendar, clock, and the currently active profile. Themes opens the application. See âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 48. Voice comms. opens the setting s for the application. See âÂÂVoice commandsâÂÂ, p. 96. Display Light sensor âÂÂPress or to adjust the light se nsor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may ca use the display to flicker in low light. Font size âÂÂAdjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery . Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the d isplay is switched off.
Settings 99 Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicat ions in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. Shortcuts > Le ft selection key and Right selection key â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active stan dby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for th e different presses of the scroll key. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the displa y texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according t o the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Wr iting language affects every application in your device, and t he change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac te rs available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionar y is not available for all languages. Cover display Brightness âÂÂClose the fold, and use the volume key to adjust the brightness on the cover display. Answer if fold opened âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to answer incoming calls by opening the fold. Sleep mode âÂÂSelect whether the displa y is switched off to save battery power after the power saver is activated. When the display is switched of f, an LED blinks to indicate that the device is powered on. Enhancement For enhancement indica tors, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 17. Some enha ncement connectors do not indicate which type of an enhancement is connected to the device.
Settings 10 0 The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time yo u connect a cert ain compatible enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 47. Automatic answer âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disa bled. Lights âÂÂSet whether lights remain on, or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. If you are using a Te xt phone or a Loopset , you must activate it on your device. To activate Text phone , select Text phone > Use text phone > Yes . To activ ate the loopset, select Loopset > Use loopset > Yes . Security To edit settings relat ed to the security, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phone and SIM card PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, th e code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PI N and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 101. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period âÂÂSelect whether the keypad is locked when your devi ce has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip! To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press , then Phone autolock period âÂÂTo avoid unauthorized use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be us ed until the correct lock code is entered. To turn of f the autolock period, select None . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 101.
Settings 101 When the device is locked, ca lls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select L ock phone . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network se rvice). When calls are limited to clos ed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Glossary of PIN and lock co des If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification num ber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthor ized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code âÂÂThis code may b e suppl ied wit h the US IM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to ac cess some functions in your device. Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avo id unautho rized use. The fact ory setting f or the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. Personal unblockin g key (PUK ) code an d PUK2 co deâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a b locked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectiv ely. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact th e operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificat es do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software.
Settings 102 In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certific ates th at are stored in yo ur device. Press to see a list of personal certific at es, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. Th e y s h o u l d a l s o b e u s e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates make s the risks involved in remote conn ections and s oftware installation considerably sm aller, th ey must be us ed correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificat es for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certifica te settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate deta ilsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificat e is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not truste d âÂÂYou have not set any applicati on to use the certificate. See âÂÂChange th e trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 102. Expired c ertificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. Certific ate not val id yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing any certificate settings, you must ma ke sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Settings 10 3 Scroll to an authority certificat e, and select Options > Trust settin gs . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. Symbian in stallation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Interne t : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java TM application. Select Options > Edit trus t setting to change the value. Security module To view or edit a secu rity module (if available) in Security module , scroll to it, and press . To view detailed information about a security modu le, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Factory settings To reset some of the settings to their original values, s elect Tools > Settings > General > Factory settings . To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Positioning Select t he used Positioning methods to detect the location of your device: Bluetooth GPS to use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, and Ne twork based to use information from the cellular network (network service). The location information can be used by compatible applications in your device. Phone To edit the settings related to making and receiving calls, press , and s elect Tools > Settings > Phone > Call , Call divert , Call barring , or Network . Call Send my caller ID âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displ ayed t o ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are call ing, or the v alue may be s et by your s ervice provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progr ess. Set the function on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the function is activated ( Check status ).
Settings 10 4 Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a calle r informing wh y you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or decline a callâÂÂ, p. 84. Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be s ent in a text messag e when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂIf video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call a fter an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automati c redialing, press . Show call duration âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call âÂÂTo have the duration of a c all briefly displayed after the call, select On . Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 79. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer a n incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscrib ed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lin es, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Call divert allows you to diver t your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you rejec t incoming ca lls, select If bus y . Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time.
Settings 10 5 Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict t he calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call divert ing cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to c ertain official emergency numbers. Network Your device can automati cally switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the wireless service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. Co ntact your service provider for more details. Operator select ion âÂÂSelect Automatic to set t he device to search for and select on e o f the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the con nection to th e manually sele cted network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to rese lect a network. The s elected ne twork must h ave a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use th e services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activ ate cell info reception. Connection To edit access point and othe r connection settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Bluetooth , USB , Access points , Packet data , Data call , SIP settings , Configurations , or Access point name control . For USB settings, see âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61.
Settings 10 6 For Bluetooth settings, see âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 59. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and acc ess points can share a data connec tion. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of ac cess points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠I nternet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access points You may receive access poi nt settings in a message f rom a service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. indicates a protected access point, and indicates a packet data access point. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an acc ess point, select Optio ns > Edit . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data c onnection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. F ill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a da ta connection, the network service provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM ca rd. Packet data access points Follow the instructions fr om your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service pro vider.
Settings 10 7 Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the internet protocol type to use: IPv4 or IPv6 . The other settings depend on the selected network typ e. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂEnte r the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary DNS address , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Secondary DNS address , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy server address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connection âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device r egister s to the packet data netwo rk. Sta rting an active packet data connectio n (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select Wh en needed , the device uses a packet data connecti on only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Data call The data call settings affect all ac cess points using a GSM data call connection. Online time âÂÂSet the data calls to automatically disconnect after a time-out if there is no activity. To enter a time-out, select User defined , and enter the time in minutes. if you select Unlimited , data calls are not automatically disconnected.
Settings 10 8 SIP settings SIP (session initiation prot ocol) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP, such as video sharing. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings . Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration message. You can sa ve view or delete these settings in Configurations . Access point name control With Access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connections a nd allow your device to use only certain packet data acce ss points. This setting is only av ailable if your SIM card supports the access point control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access point s, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider fo r the code. Applications To edit the settings of some o f the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . The settings are also available in each application by selecting the settings option.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 10 9 Troubleshooting: Q&A Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your wireless service provider. For information about passwords, contact your acc ess point provider, for example , a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider. Battery Q: Why does my bat tery drain fast? A: Features using Blue tooth technology, or all owing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce battery life time. Also packet data connection s increase the demand on battery power. If you have set Packet data connection to When available in Connection settings , and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), your device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection, which causes the increased demand on battery power. To prolong the operating t ime of your device, turn the Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it. Also set Packet data connection to When needed . To close all the applications that are running in the background, and you do not use, press and hold , and select the applications from the list. Then exit the application. Application n ot responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, an d are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions betwee n the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connect ed to your device, you c an either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetoot h connectivity. Se lect Tool s > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Camer a Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Display
Troubleshooting: Q&A 11 0 Q: Why do missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots t hat remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete unused items saved in your device regularly to avoid memory gett ing low. See âÂÂMemory lowâ free memoryâÂÂ, p. 20. To delete contact information, cale ndar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, o r any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory t o perform operatio n. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data from phone me mory. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the sm allest item). To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data gr oups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of t he following methods: â¢U s e N o k i a Nseries PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then sa ve the image s to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth co nnectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I sele ct a contact? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the miss ing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefl y. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that t he settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia msg. . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the de vice from making a data connection, press , and select Messagi ng > Op tions > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval and one of the following: Manual âÂÂto have the multimedia mess aging center save messages to be retrieved later. You receive a notification when there is a new multim edia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 111 Off âÂÂto ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia Nseries PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia Nseries PC Suite on the CD-ROM. For further information on ho w to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia Nserie s PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network servi c e), you can divert incoming fax calls to another phone number.
Battery information 11 2 Battery information Charging and disc harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged h undreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the b attery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is b eing used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely di scharged, it may take several minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be mad e. Use the battery only for it s intended purpose. Neve r use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with wate r, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from
Battery information 11 3 an authori zed Nokia d ealer, lo ok for the No kia Origin al Enhancements logo on the packaging, and inspect the hologram label using the following s teps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your batter y is not an authent ic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Noki a s ervice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authenticit y. If authenticity ca nnot be verified, return the battery to th e place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle t he hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 do ts on each side respectively. 3 Scratc h the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for exampl e, 12345678919876 543210. Turn the battery so th at the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 4 Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/batterycheck. To create a text message, enter the 20-digit code, for example, 123456 78919876543210, an d send to 44 7786 200276. To create a text message, ⢠For countries in Asia Pacifi c, excluding India: Enter the 20-digit code, for example, 123456789198765 43210, and send to 61 427151515. ⢠For India only: Enter Battery followed by the 20-digit battery code, for example, Battery 12345678919876 543210, and se nd to 5555. National and international operator charges will apply.
Battery information 11 4 You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approv al or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 11 5 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the de vice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving pa rts and ele ctronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than as ins tructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device. Rough handling can break intern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to cle an the device. ⢠Do not paint the device . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light s ensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backu p of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calend ar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and re move the battery. These suggestions apply e qually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facil ity for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrica l and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to se parate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection t o prevent possible harm to the environment or huma n health from uncontrolled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collect ion information is available from the product retailer, local waste authori ties, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, s ee product Eco-
Care and maintenance 11 6 Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.com.
Additional safety information 11 7 Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain sm all parts. Keep them out of the re ach of small chil dren. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/8 inch es) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, t ransmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is av ailable. Ensure the abov e separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Cons ult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospit als or heal th care facilitie s may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cent imeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons w ho have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.
Additional safety information 11 8 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical devi ce. If you have any questions abou t using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless device s may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, e lectronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, o f your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service t he device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate a ny warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equi pment in your vehicle is mounted and operating prop erly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or ex plosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles eq uipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, seriou s injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and ob ey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmos phere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on b oats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehi cles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas w here the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
Additional safety information 11 9 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for es sential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls . 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in us e, you may first need to t urn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to act ivate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Cons ult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (S AR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety marg ins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices e mploy a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount cha n ges depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork ba se station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.04 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
120 Index A access point name control 108 access points 105 activation keys See digital rights manageme nt active standby mode 49 active toolbar 31 Adobe reader 91 alarm clo ck 65 application manager 93 applications installing 93 Java 93 removing 94 automati c answer 100 B backing up data 19 batteries authenti cating 112 charging 112 intended for use 9 Bluetooth connectivity 58 device address 60 pairing 60 security 59 sending data 59 switching off 59 bookmarks 51 C cache, clearing 56 calculator 91 calendar creating entries 65 synchronizing Nokia Nseries PC Suite 66 call log See log calls answering 84 barring 105 declining 84 diverting 104 duration 85 international 78 making 78 missed 85 received 85 settings 103 sharing video 82 transferring 85 waiting 85 camera active toolbar 30 adjusting lighting and color 33 editing videos 43 flash 33 fold-closed mode 29 fold-open mode 29 image setup settings 33 saving video clips 35 scenes 34 self-timer 35 sequence mode 34 shooting video 35 still image camera settings 32 taking pictures 29 video recorder settings 37 capture key 15 cell broadcast 76 certificates 101 chargers 9 chat
12 1 See instant messaging clock 65 codes 101 color tone 33 computer connections 62 conferenc e call 79 configurations 108 connection settings 105 contact c ards 88 inserting pictures 88 sending 88 contact information 11 converter 91 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 89 copyright protection See digital rights manageme nt cover di splay fold closed 13 personalisation 49 settings 99 D data cable 61 data call, settings 107 data connections details 58 ending 58 establishing 106 indicators 17 network 8 , 105 settings 105 date 65 delivery reports 74 device manager 62 dictionary 68 digital rights management 95 DRM See digital rights management E edit key 14 editing images 42 e-mail automatic retrievin g 72 deleting mailbox 74 deleting messages 72 opening 71 , 72 remote mailbox 71 retrieving from mailbox 71 saving 76 sending 68 settings 74 viewing attachments 72 writing 68 enhancement settings 99 exposure compensation 33 F file formats .3gp 29 .jad 93 .jar 93 , 94 .mp4 29 .sis 93 music player 21 RealPlayer 27 file manager 19 fixed dialing 89 FM radio 25 fold-closed mode 13 fold-open mode 14 font size 98 G gallery active toolbar 39 editing images 42 free memory 40 images and videos 35 , 38 ordering files in albums 40 , 42 presentations 44 print basket 40 printing images 41 slide show 43 GPRS See data conn ections
122 GPS positioning 97 H hands-free operation See loudspeaker headset 18 help application 11 I idle sceen See standby mode images See gallery indicators essential 17 still image camera 30 video capture 36 installing applications 93 instant messaging 77 internet See web internet access points ( IAP) See access points J Java 93 K keyguard 18 , 100 keypad lock 18 , 100 keys 14 L language settings 99 LED 18 , 99 light sensitivity 33 lock code 101 log duration 86 erasing contents 86 filtering 86 loudspeaker 18 M mailbox 71 maintenanc e 115 media keys 15 memory freeing memory 20 , 40, 85 viewing memory consumption 20 memory card memory card tool 19 menu key 14 menu, rearranging 47 messaging cell broadcast 76 e-mail 68 inbox 69 mailbox 71 multimedia messages 68 settings 73 text messages 68 microSD card 19 missed calls 85 MMS See multimedia messages mode key 15 modes accessing features 12 fold closed 13 fold open 14 movies, muvees custom muvees 44 quick muvees 44 multimedia key 14 multimedia messages creating 68 receiving 69 retrieving 70 saving 76 sending 68 settings 73 music See music player music player downloading music 23 file formats 21
123 music shop 23 playlists 22 transferring music 23 N network mode 105 Nokia Lifeblog 28 notes 92 O offline profile 48 P packet data settings 10 7 PC connections 62 pdf files 91 personalization 48 phone language 99 phone book See contact cards PIN codes 101 positioning 97 power saver 98 power saver LED 18 printing images 41 profiles 47 PUK codes 101 push to talk 86 Q quick cover keys 15 R radio 25 RealPlayer 27 recent calls 85 recor der 92 remote mailbox 71 remote SIM mode 61 resolu tion image capture 29 image quality settings 32 video quality settings 37 ringing tones personal ringing tone 90 See also profiles S safety additional information 117 emergency calls 119 guidelines 7 scenes image scenes 34 video scenes 34 screen saver 49 scroll key 14 security code See lock code security se ttings 100 self-t imer, camer a 35 sending contact card s, business car ds 88 messages 68 sequence mode 34 service comm ands 67 setting s access points 106 application 98 Bluetooth connectiv i ty 59 call barring 105 call diverting 104 certificates 101 cover displ ay 99 data call 107 data connections 105 defining 12 display 98 e-mail 71 , 74 enhancements 99 general 98 keypad lock 100 language 99 lock code 101 messaging 73 multimedia messages 73
124 original settings 10 3 personalisation 98 personalizing the phone 47 PIN code 101 power saver 98 security 100 SIP 108 text messages 73 UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 settings wizard 12 SIM card copying names and numbers to your device 89 messages 72 names and numbers 89 using device without a SIM card 48 sis file 93 sleep mode 18 , 99 SMS See text messages snooze 65 software installing applications 93 removing applications 94 transferring a file to your device 93 software update 12 songs file formats 21 transferring 23 sound clips 38 sounds adjusting volume 18 muting a ringing tone 84 recording sounds 92 speaker phone See loudspeaker speed dialing 79 , 104 standby mode 47 , 99 support information 11 svg files 44 synchronization 62 T text messages inbox 67 receiving 69 saving 76 sendin g 68 , 69 settings 73 writin g 69 themes 48 time 65 tones See ringing tones transferring content from another device 16 transferring music 23 troubleshooting 109 U UMTS See data connections UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 USB data cable 61 USSD commands 67 V video call answering 84 making 80 rejecting 84 video clips 38 video player See RealPlayer videos See gallery Visual Radio 25 voice commands 96 voice dialing 80 voice mailbox 79 changing the phone number 79 diverting calls to voice mailbox 104
125 voice me ssages 79 voice t ags 96 making calls 80 volume co ntrol adjusting volume 18 during a call 78 loudspeaker 18 volume ke ys 15 W wallpapers changing 48 cover display 49 using pictures 32 , 39 web access points, See access points blogs 55 browser 51 feeds 55 service messages 70 weblog 28 welcome application 12 white balance 33 wireless keybo ard 92 writing language 99
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-135 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and othe r relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/ EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/declarat ion_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseries, N76, Navi and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corpor ation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or traden ames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transf er, distribution, or storag e of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product includes software licensed from Symbia n Software Ltd (c) 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which ha s been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is gra nted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial use s, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development . Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER N O CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS L ICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDE NTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, N O WARRANT IES OF ANY KIND, EITH ER EXPRES S OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIE D WARRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE MA DE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABIL ITY OR CONTENTS OF T HIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please che ck with your Nokia dealer for details, a nd availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence receive d , including interference t hat may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been create d and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia . Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARR ANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW . YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIE S, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NO T 0434
LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE , MERCHANTABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICA TIONS WILL NOT INFRI NGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATENT S, COPYRI GHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIG HTS. Issue 1 EN, 9254268
1 Wa rranty and reference information 1. Contact Nokia ................................ ........................... ........... 3 Get help ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........ .......... ....... ........ 4 Find your phone label .......... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... 4 Updates ........ ....... ........... ....... ........ .......... ....... ........ .......... ........ ....... .......... ........ 4 Register your phone .............. ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... .... 4 E-newsletter s ............ ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... 4 2. Nokia One-Year Limited W arranty ............. ........................ 5 3. Message from t he CTIA ............................... ........................ 9 4. Message from t he FDA ............................................. ......... 12 9241365 9241365 Issue 2
2 LEGAL I NFORMATION Part No. 9241 365, Issue N o. 2 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of par t or all of the c ontents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. UNDER NO C IRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA BE RESPONSI BLE FOR ANY LO SS OF DATA OR INCOME OR AN Y SPECIAL, INCIDEN TAL, AND CONSEQU ENTIAL OR INDIR ECT DAMAG ES HOWSO EVER C AUSE D. T H E C O N T E N T S O F T H I S D O C U M E N T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S I S . " E X C E P T A S R E Q U I R E D B Y APPLICABLE LA W , NO WARRANTIES O F ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT L IMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W A RRANTIES OF M ERCHANTA BILITY AND FIT N ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, AR E MADE IN RELATION TO TH E ACCURACY A ND RELIABILIT Y OR CONTENTS OF THIS DO CUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS DOCUM ENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTI CE.
Contact Nok ia 3 1. Cont act Nokia If you ever nee d to call Nokia Care Contac t Center, you w ill need to provide specific information abou t your phone. Whet her you are calling about you r device or an enhancement, have the eq uipment with yo u when you call. If a Nokia representative asks a specific question about the enh ancement, you will have it available for quick referenc e. Nokia Care C ontact Cent er , USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #160 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel: 1-888-NOKI A-2U (1-888-665 -4228) Fax: 1-8 13 -249-9619 Web s it e: www.nokiausa.com/s upport In Canada call: Tel: 1-888-22-NOK IA (1-888-226 -6542) Web s it e: www .nokia.ca For TTY/T DD users o nly: 1-800-24-NOKIA ( 1-800-246-65 42)
Contact Nok ia 4 â Get help Find your pho n e label If you need to ca ll the Nok ia Care Cont act Center or your servic e provider, you will need to provide specific info rmation about your phone. This inform ation is provided on the phone label (1), which is on the back of the phone (unde r the batte ry). It contains the model and serial n umbers, as well as ot her important information about y our phone. To help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have the following information av ailable before c ontacting the Nokia Care Contac t Center: ⢠Your phone model number ⢠Type number ⢠Internation al mobile e quipmen t iden tity (IMEI) or electronic serial number (ESN) ⢠Your zip code ⢠The phone or enhanceme nt in question â Updates Check www .no kiausa.com /support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest ve rsion of thi s guide , addition al info rmati on, dow nloads, an d servi ces rela ted to you r No ki a produc t. You m ay also down load f ree config uration settings su ch as MMS, GPR S, e-mai l, and oth er serv ices fo r your phone m odel at www .nokiausa. com/phonesetting s . If you still requir e assistance, check the list of local Nokia contact centers at www.noki ausa.com/custome rservice or www.nokiausa.com/co ntact_us . â Register your phone Make sure to register your phone at www.warranty.nokiau sa.com or call 1-888- NOKIA-2U (1-888 -665-422 8) so that we ca n serve your need s better if you sho uld need to call a custom er cente r or to have yo ur phone re paired. â E-newslette rs When you re gister your phone , you can sign up for the Noki a e-newslette r, Nokia Connections. You will receive tips and tricks on using your phone, enhancement information, and special offe rs.
Nokia On e-Yea r Limite d War ranty 5 2. Nokia One-Y ear Limited Warranty Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) warrants that this cellular phone (âÂÂProductâÂÂ) is free from defects in material an d workmanship that result in Produ ct failure during normal usage, according to th e following terms and con ditions: 1. The limited warra nty for the Pr oduct extends for ONE (1) ye ar beginni ng on the date of the pur chase of the Product. T his one year per iod is extende d by each whole day that the Pr oduct is out of y our possess ion for repa ir under this war ranty. 2. The limited warranty extend s only to the original purcha ser (âÂÂConsumerâ ) of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to an y subsequent purchaser/ end-us er. 3. The limited warranty extends only to Consumers who purchase the Product in the Un ited States of America . 4. During the lim ited warranty period, Nokia will re pair, or replace, at NokiaâÂÂs sole option, any de fective parts, or any parts tha t will not properly operate for their int ended use with new or refurbis hed replaceme nt items if such repair or replacement is needed because of pr oduct ma lfunction or failure durin g normal usag e. No charge will be made to the Consumer for any such parts . Nokia will also pa y for the labor charges incurred by Nokia in re pairing or replacing the defective parts. The limited warranty does not cov er defects in appearance, cos metic, decorative or structural items, incl uding framing, and any non -operative parts. NokiaâÂÂs limit of liability under the limite d warranty shall be the actu al cash v alue of th e Product at the time the C onsume r returns the Product for repair, determine d by the price paid by the Consume r for the Product less a reason able amount for usage. Nokia shall not be liable for any other losse s or dam ages. T hese remed ies ar e the Consum erâÂÂs e xclusive remedies for breach of warrant y. 5. Upon request from Nokia, the Consumer must prove the date of the original purchase of the Product by a dated bill of sale or dated itemized receipt. 6. The Consumer shall bear th e cost of shipping th e Product to Nokia. Nokia shall bear t he cost of shipping the Pr oduct b ack to the Co nsum er after t he compl etion of service under this limited w arranty. 7. The C onsumer sha ll have no coverage or benefi ts under th is limited wa rranty if any of the followin g conditions are applicable: a) The Product ha s been subjecte d to abnormal use, abnorm al conditions, improper storage, exposure to mois ture or dampne ss, unauthorize d modifications, unauthorize d connections, unauthorized repair, misuse, neglect, abuse , accident, alt eration, improper installation, or othe r acts which are not the fault of Nokia, including damage caused by shippin g.
Nokia On e-Ye ar Limit ed Wa rranty 6 b) The Product has been damaged from ex ternal causes such as collision with an object , or from fire , flooding, sand , dirt, win dstorm, ligh tning , earthq uake or damage from exposure to weather conditions, an Act of God, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or impro per use of any electrical source, damage caus ed by compu ter or internet vi ruses , bugs, worms, Trojan Horses, cancelbots or damage caused by the connection to oth er products not recommended for int erconnection by Nokia. c) Nokia was not advised in writing by the Consumer of the alleged defec t or malfunction of the Product with in fourteen (1 4) days after the e xpiration of the applicable limit ed warranty period. d) The Product serial number plate or the enhancement data code has been removed, defaced or altered. e) The defec t or damage was caused by the defective function of the cellular system or by inadequate signal reception by the external antenna, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product. 8. Nokia does not warrant uninterru pted or error-free operation of the Product. If a problem develops during the lim ited warranty period, the Consumer shall take th e follow ing step- by-s tep pro cedure: a) The Cons umer shall retu rn the Product to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. b) If âÂÂa â is not convenie nt becau se of dis tance ( more tha n 50 mile s) or fo r other good cause, the Consume r shall ship the Product prepaid and insure d to Nokia. See www.noki ausa.com/ support for the address of the repair center neares t you. c) The Consumer shall include a return addres s, daytime phone number and/or fax number, c omplete description of the prob lem, proof of purchase and service agreement (if applicable). Expenses relate d to removing the Product from an installati on are not covered under this lim ited warranty. d) The Consumer will be billed for any pa rts or labor charges not covered by this limited wa rranty. The Cons umer will be responsible for any expenses related to reinstallation of the Product. e) Noki a will repair the Product under the limited warranty w ithin 30 days after receipt of the Product. If Nokia cannot perform repairs covered under this limited wa rranty within 30 da ys, or after a reaso nable number of attempts to repair the same defect, Nokia at its option, will prov ide a replacement Product or refund the purch ase price of the Product less a reasonable amount for usage. In some states the Consum er may have the right to a loaner if the repair of the Produc t takes more than ten (10) days.
Nokia On e-Yea r Limite d War ranty 7 Please con tact the No kia Care Co ntact Cent er at the tel ephone n umber listed at the end of th is warranty if you need a loa ner and the repair of the Product has take n or is estimated to ta ke more than ten (1 0) days. f) If the Produ ct is returned during th e limited warranty period, but the problem with the Product is not covered unde r the terms and conditions of this limited warranty, the Cons umer will be notified and giv en an estimate of the charges the Consumer must pay to have the Produc t repaired, with all shipping charge s billed to the Consume r. If the estimate is refused, the Product will be return ed freight collect. If the Produ ct is returned after the expiration of the limited warranty peri od, NokiaâÂÂs normal servi ce policies shall apply and the Consumer will be responsi ble for all shipping charges. 9. You (the Consumer) unde rstand that the produ ct may cons ist of refurbished equip ment that c ontains used c omponents, som e of which ha ve been reprocessed. The used components comply with Product performance and reliability specific ations. 10 . ANY IMPLIE D WARRANTY OF ME RCHANTA BILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE FOREGO ING LIMITED WRITTEN WARR ANTY. OTHE RWISE, THE FO REGOING LI MITED WARRANTY IS THE CONSUMERâÂÂS SOL E AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECI AL, INCID ENTAL, PUNIT IVE OR CONSEQU ENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDI NG BUT NOT LIMI TED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED BENEFITS OR PRO FITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COS T OF A NY SU BSTITU TE EQ UIPME NT OR FACI LITIES, DOW NTIM E, THE CLAIM S OF ANY THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND INJURY TO PROPERTY, RESULT ING FROM THE PURCH ASE OR USE OF THE PROD UCT OR ARIS ING FROM BREACH O F THE WARRANT Y, BREACH O F CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEO RY, EVEN IF NOKIA KNEW OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOKIA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDE R THE LIMITED WARRANTY, OR LOSS OF USE DURI NG THE PERIO D THAT THE PROD UCT IS BE I NG REPAIRED. 11 . Som e states do no t allo w li mitati on of how lo ng an i mplied warran ty la sts, so the one year warr anty limitati on may not a pply to you (the Consum er). Some states do not allow t he e xclusion or limi tatio n of in cidenta l and conseque ntial damage s, so cert ain of t he abov e limit ations or exclu sions may n ot apply to yo u (the Consumer). This limi ted warranty gives the Consu mer specific legal right s and the Consumer may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
Nokia On e-Ye ar Limit ed Wa rranty 8 12. Nokia neither as sumes nor authorizes any authorized service center or any other person or entity to as sume for it any other obligation or liability beyond that wh ich is expressly provid ed for in this limited wa rranty includin g the provider or seller of any extended warranty or service agreement. 13. This is the entire wa rranty betwee n Nokia and th e Consumer , and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements or understandings, oral or written, relating to the Product, and no representation, promise or condition n ot containe d herein shall m odify these terms . 14. This limited warranty allocates the risk of failure of the Product between the Consumer and Nok ia. The allocation is recognized by the Consumer and is reflected in the purch ase price. 15. Any action or lawsuit for breach of warranty must be commenced within eighteen (18) months follow ing purchase of the Product. 16. Quest ions concern ing this limited w arranty may be directed to: Nokia Inc. Telephone: 1-8 88-NOK IA-2U (1-888- 665-4228) Facsimile : (813) 249- 9619 TTY/TDD Use rs Only: 1-80 0-24-NOK IA (1-800-24 6-6542) Websi te: www.no kiausa.com /suppor t
Message from the CTIA 9 3. Message from the CTIA (Cellular T e lecommunication s & Internet Association) to all users of mobile phones é 2001 Cellula r Telecommunic ations & Intern et Association. All Rights R eserved. 1250 Con necticut Ave nue, NW Suite 800, Washin gton, DC 200 36. Phone: (202) 785-008 1 Safety is the most important call you w ill ever make. â A Guide to Safe and Responsible Wireless Phone Use Tens of milli ons of pe ople i n the U .S. tod ay take advan tage of the un ique c ombi natio n of convenience , safety and value delivered by the wireless tel ephone. Quite simply, the wireless phone gives people the powerful ability to commu nicate by voiceâ almost anywhere , anytim eâÂÂwith the boss, with a c lient, with th e kids, wit h emergency personnel or even with the police. Each year, Americans make billions of calls from their wireless phones, and the numbers are rapidly growing.But an important responsibil ity accompanies those benefits, one t h at every wi reless phone user must uphold. Whe n driving a car, driving is your firs t responsibility. A wireless phone can be an invaluable tool, but good judgm ent must be exercised at all times while driving a motor vehicle âÂÂwhether on the phone or no t.The basic lessons are ones we all lear ned as teenagers . Driving requires ale rtness, caution and courtesy. It re quire s a he avy d ose of basi c com mon sens eâÂÂkeep yo ur he ad up, ke ep your e yes on the ro ad, check your mir rors frequ ently an d watch out for oth er driv ers. It requir es obeying all traffic signs and signals and staying within the speed lim it. It means using seatbelts and requiring other passengers to do the same. But with wireless phone use, driving sa fely means a little more. This broc hure is a call to wireless phone us ers everywhe re to mak e safety their firs t priori ty when behin d the whe el of a car. Wireless telecommun ications is keeping us in touch, simplify ing our lives, protecting us in emergenc ies and providing opportunities to h elp others in need. When it com es to the use of wireless phon es, safety is your most import ant call.
Message from the CTIA 10 â Wireless Phone "Safety Tips" Below are safet y tips to follow while driving and using a wireless phone which should be easy to remember. 1. Get to know your wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most phone s offer, including aut omatic redial and memory. Also, work to mem oriz e the p hone k eypad so you can use th e spee d dial func tion without taking your atte ntion off the road. 2. Wh en availabl e, use a ha nds-fre e devi ce. A numb er o f hands -free wir eless phone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your wireless phone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you. 3. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Make sure you place your wireless phone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an inco ming c all at an inconven ient time, if possible, let your voice ma il answer it for you. 4. Suspend conversations during hazardous driving con ditions or situations. Let the per son you ar e speaki ng with kn ow you are driv ing; if ne cessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather c onditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be haza rdous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, you r first responsibility is to pay attention to the road. 5. Do not take notes or look up phone numbe rs wh ile driving. If you are rea ding an address book or business card, or writing a "to do" list while driving a car, you are not w atching where yo u are goin g. ItâÂÂs common se nse. Do nâÂÂt get ca ught in a dang erous situati on because you are readin g or writing a nd not pa ying a ttention to the road or nearby vehicle s. 6. Dial sen sibly and ass ess the traffi c; if possibl e, place cal ls when you are not moving or before pulling in to traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip or atte mpt to coinc ide your ca lls with time s you may b e stopp ed at a stop sign, red ligh t or otherw ise stationa ry. But if y ou need to dial wh ile driving, follow this simple tipâÂÂdia l only a few numbe rs, check the road and your mirrors, then contin ue. 7. Do not engage in stressful or emotiona l conversations that m ay be distracting. Stressfu l or emotio nal c onversati ons and dri ving do n ot mix âÂÂthey a re distrac ting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel of a car. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend conversations which hav e the potential to div ert your attention from the road.
Message from the CTIA 11 8. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Your w ireless phone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situationsâ with your phone at your side, help is only three numbe rs away. Dial 9-1-1 or other loca l emerg ency number i n the cas e of fire, traffic accident, road hazard or medical emergency. Remembe r, it is a free call on your wireless phone! 9. Use your wireless phone to help oth ers in emergencies. Your wireless phone provide s you a perfe ct opp ortu nity to b e a "G ood Sa maritan " in y our co mmuni ty. If you see an auto accident, c rime in progress or oth er serious emergency where lives are in dange r, call 9-1-1 or other local e mergency n umber, as you would want others to do for you. 10. Call roadside assistance or a spec ial wirel ess nonem ergency assi stance number when necess ary. Certain si tuations you encoun ter while driving may require attention, but ar e not urgen t enough to merit a call for emerge ncy servic es. But you still can use you r wireless phone to len d a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing n o serious haz ard, a broken traffic signa l, a minor traf fic accident where no one appears injured or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or othe r special non-em ergenc y wireless nu mber. Careless, distracted individu als and people driving irres ponsibly represent a hazard to everyon e on the road. Since 1984, the C ellular Tel ecommunicatio ns Industry Association and the wireless industry h ave conducted e ducational outrea ch to inform wireless phone use rs of their responsibilities as safe drivers and good citizens . As we approach a ne w century, more and more of us wi ll take adv antage of the benefits of wireless telephones . And, a s w e t a k e t o t h e r o a d s , w e a l l h a v e a responsibility to drive safely.The wireless industry re minds you to use your phone safely wh en driving. For more information, pleas e call 1-888-901 -SAFE. For updates: http: //www.wow-c om.com/co nsume r/issues/dr ivi ng/a rticl es.c fm?ID =85
Message from the FDA 12 4. Message from the FDA The U.S . Food and Drug Administratio n (FD A ) pr ovides th e foll owing c onsumer inform ation about w ireless ph ones. See http://www .fda.gov/cellphones/ for updated information. D o w i r e l e s s p h o n e s p o s e a h e a l t h h a z a r d ? The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associate d with using wireless phones. Ther e is no proof, however, that wireless phones are abso lutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequ ency energy (RF) in the micro wave rang e while be ing used . They al so emit ve ry low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Wherea s high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects ca uses no known ad verse heal th effects. Ma ny studies of low le vel RF exposures have not found an y biological effects. Some studie s have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findin gs have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, ot her researchers have had difficu lty in reproducing those studies, or in determin ing the reasons for inconsistent result s. What is FD A's r ole co ncern ing the saf ety of wir eless phon es? Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless ph ones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devic es. However, the agency has authority to take action if w ireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could re quire the manufact urers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to re pair, replace or recall the phone s so that the hazard no lon ger exists. Although the existing scientific da ta do not justify FD A regulatory actions , FDA has urged the wi reless ph one in dustry to ta ke a num ber of steps, in cludin g the follow ing: ⢠Support needed re search into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless phones; ⢠Design wireles s phones in a way that mini mizes any RF expos ure to the user that is not nece ssary for de vice function; and ⢠Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible information on possible effects of wi reless phone use on human hea lth. FDA belongs to an interagency working group of th e federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordina ted efforts at the federal level. The following agenc ies belong to this working group: ⢠National Institute for Occupation al Safety and Health ⢠Environmental Prote ction Agency
Message from the FDA 13 ⢠Federal Com munications Comm ission ⢠Occupational Safety and Heal th Administ ration ⢠National Telecom munications and Information Adm inistration The National Institutes of Health partici pates in some interagency wo rking group activiti es, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wirele ss phones with the Federal Commun ications Comm ission (FCC). All phone s that are sold in the United States must com ply with FCC safety guidelines tha t limit RF exposure. FC C relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also re gul ates t he base stations that the wireless phone netw orks rel y upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do th e wireless phones themselves, the RF exposure s that people get from these base station s are typically thousands of ti mes lower tha n those they c a n get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the p rimary subject of the safet y questions di scussed in this do cument. What is FDA do i ng to fi nd out m ore about t he possib le health effec ts of wirele ss phone RF? FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with group s of investigators arou nd the world t o ensure that high priority an imal stud ies are conducted to addres s important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in t he World Health Organization Internation al Electromagnetic Field s (EMF) Project since its ince ption in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the de velopment of a det ailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information do cuments on EMF issue s. FDA and the Cellular Tele communication s & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight , obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to in dependent investigato rs. The initial rese arch will include both labo rat ory stud ies a nd studies of wir eless phone users. The CRADA wil l also include a broad assessment of ad diti onal rese arch nee ds in t he c onte xt of the l ate st re sear ch developments aroun d the world. What ste ps c an I t ake to r educe my expo sure to radi ofreque ncy e nergy f rom my w ireless phon e? If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is proba bly very sma ll. But if you ar e concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few sim ple st eps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency
Message from the FDA 14 energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spe nt using a wireless phon e will reduce RF exposure. If you must conduct ex tended conversations by wireless phone eve ry day, you could place more distance between you r body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connecte d to a remote antenn a. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that w ireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about th e RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use. What abou t children u sing wirel ess phone s? The scientific e vidence does not show a dange r to users of w ireless phones, including childre n and teenagers. I f you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Redu cing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between t h e user and the RF source will reduce RF exposur e. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For e xample, the gove rnment in the United King dom distributed leaflets containing such a recommen dation in December 2000. They note d that no evidence exists tha t using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or othe r ill effects. Their recom mendation to limit wire less phone use by ch ildren was strictly preca utionary; it wa s not based on scientific evidenc e that any he alth hazard exist s. Do hands- free kits f or wireless pho nes redu ce ris ks fr om e xpo sure to RF e missi ons? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wi reless phones, there is no reason to believe that han ds-free kits reduce risks. Hands -free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone, which is the source of the RF em issions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand , if the p hone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wire less phones marke ted in the U.S. are required to meet safety requ irements regardless of whether they are use d against the head or against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.
Message from the FDA 15 Do wire less ph one access ories that clai m to shi eld th e head fro m RF radiatio n work? Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless phon es, there is no reason to believe t hat accessorie s that claim t o shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shiel d the use r from RF absorption use special phone cases, w hile others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studie s have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike "han d -free" kits, t h ese so-called "shiel d s" may i nterfer e wit h prope r oper ation of the p hone. The ph one m ay be forced to boost its power to compensa te, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In Fe bruary 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phon e users from radiation with making false and unsubs tantiated claims . Accordi ng to FTC, these defendants lac ked a reasonable basis to substant iate their claim. How does FCC Audit Cell Phone RF? After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed, FCC will occasionally conduct âÂÂpost-grantâ testing to determine whether prod uction versions of the phone are being produced to conform with FCC regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that does not me et FCCâÂÂs regulatory requirements may b e requ ired to remov e the c ell ph one fr om use and to refun d the pu rchase price or provi de a replaceme nt phon e, and may be subje ct to civil or crim inal pen alties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a ri sk of injury to th e user, FDA ma y also take regu latory action. The mos t important pos t-grant test, from a co nsumerâÂÂs perspective, is testing of the RF emission s of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any scientific meas urement, the re is a possibility that the test measure ment may be less than or gre ater than t he actual RF emitted by the phone. This difference between t he RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test meas uremen ts are limited by ins trument a ccuracy, bec ause te st measureme nt and actual use environments are different, an d other variable factors. This inherent variability is known a s âÂÂmeasurement unce rtainty.â When FC C conducts post-grant testi ng of a cel l ph one, FCC takes i nto accou nt any mea surement uncer tain ty to determine w hether regulatory action is appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory ac tion, it will have a sound, defensible scien tific basis. FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approa ch, given our cu rrent understanding of the risks presented by cellular phone RF emis sions. RF emissions from cellular phone s have not bee n shown to present a risk of injury to the user when th e me asured SAR is less than th e safety limits set by FCC (an SAR of 1.6 w/kg ). Even in a case wh ere
16 the maximu m measurement uncertaint y permitted by cu rrent measureme nt standards was added to the maximum perm issible SAR, the resultin g SAR value would be well below any level known to produ ce an acute effect. Consequently, FCCâÂÂs approach with measureme nt uncertainty will not result in co nsumers being exposed to any known risk from the RF emitted by cellular telephon es. FDA will contin ue to monitor studie s and literature reports concerning acute effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure to cellular tele phone RF (that is, the risk s from using a cell phone for man y years). If new information leads FDA to bel ieve that a c hange to F CCâÂÂs measu rement poli cy may be appropriate, FD A will contact FCC and both agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach. Updated July 29, 2003
17 Garantàa e información de referen cia 1. Contacto c on Nokia ......... ......................................... ......... 19 Solicitar ayuda ...... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... .. 20 Localiza r la etiqueta de su teléfono ........ ....... ........... ....... .......... ...... 20 Actualiza ciones ........ .......... ........ .......... ....... ........ .......... ........ ....... .......... ...... 20 Registre su teléfono ... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... .. 20 Boletines el ectrónicos .......... ....... ........... ....... ....... ........... ....... ........... ....... .. 20 2. GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1) Año .................. ......... 21 3. Mensaje de la CTIA ...................................... ...................... 25 4. Mensaje de l a FDA.......................... ........................... ......... 2 8 9241365 Edición no. 2
18 INFOR MACIàN L EGAL Parte No. 92413 65, Edición No . 2 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. Todos los derechos reservados. Se prohÃÂbe la reproducción, transferencia, distribución o almacenamiento de este documento en cualquier forma sin el previo permiso escrito de parte de Nokia. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, y los logos de Nokia Original Enhancements son marcas, registradas o no, de Nokia Corporation. Otros nombres de productos y compañÃÂas aquàmencionados podrÃÂan ser marcas o nombres, registrados o no, de sus respectivos propietarios. BAJO N INGÃÂN CON CEPTO NOKIA SERàRESPO NSABLE POR CUALQU IER PÃÂRDIDA DE DATOS O GANANCIA S O POR CUALQ UIER OTRO DAÃÂO ESPECIAL O INCIDEN TAL Y CONSECUENT E, POR CUALQUIER CAUSA D IRECTA O INDIRECTA. EL CONTENIDO DE ESTE DOCUMENTO ESTàPROVISTO "TAL CUAL". ADEMÃÂS DE LAS EXIGIDAS POR LAS LEYES, NO SE EMITE NINGUNA OTRA GARANTÃÂA DE NINGÃÂN TIPO, SEA EXPRESA O IMPLÃÂCITA, INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, GARA NTÃÂAS IMPLÃÂCITAS DE MERC ADEO Y DE CAPACIDAD PARA UN PROP ÃÂSITO PARTICULAR, EN CUAN TO A LA PRECISIÃÂN Y FIABIL IDAD O CONTE NIDO DE ESTE DOCUM ENTO . NOKIA SE RESERVA EL DERECHO DE R EVISAR ESTE DOCUM ENT O O DESCONTI NUAR SU U S O EN C UALQUI ER MOM ENTO SIN PRE VIO AVIS O .
Contact o con Nokia 19 1. Cont acto co n Noki a Si por alguna razón necesita llamar al Centro de Atención Nokia Care, deberá proveer datos especÃÂficos sobre su teléfono . Si está llamando s obre su dispositivo o un accesorio, tén galo a la mano al hac e r la llamada. De e s ta forma, si un represent ante de Nokia se le pregunta sobre el acceso rio, lo tendrá para fácil referencia. Centr o de Aten ción Nokia Care, EE.UU Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #160 T ampa, Florida 336 14 Tel: 1-888-NOKI A-2U (1-888-665 -4228) Fax: 1-8 13 -249-9619 Pág. Web: www .nokiausa.com/support En C anad á: Tel: 1-888-22-NOK IA (1-888-226 -6542) Pág. Web: www .nokia.ca Sólo para us uarios de TTY/ TDD: 1-800-24-NOKIA ( 1-800-246-65 42)
Contact o con Nokia 20 â Solicitar ayuda Localiza r la etiqueta de su teléfono Si necesita llamar al Centro de Atención Nokia Care o proveedor de servicio, te ndrá que proveer información especÃÂfica sobre su teléfono. Esta informa ción está en la etiqueta del teléfono (1), que se encue ntra en la parte posterior del teléfono (debajo de la baterÃÂa). Contiene el número de modelo y números seriales, al igual que otra información importante sobre su teléfono . Para que Nokia pueda responder a sus preg untas de manera rápida, fa v or de tener disponibl e la siguie nte informac ión antes de llamar al C entro de Atención Noki a Care: ⢠El número de modelo de su teléfono â¢T i p o ⢠Identificación del Equ ipo Móvil Interna cional (IMEI) o Número Electrónico de Serie (ESN) ⢠Su código postal ⢠El teléfono o acceso rio en cuestión â Actualizaciones Vis ite www.nokiau sa.com/s upport o su página Web local de Nokia para obtener la versión más rec iente de este manual, información adicion al, descargas y servicios relaciona dos a su produc to Nokia. Ta mbién podrÃÂa de scargar ajustes de configuraci ones gratuitos tal como M MS, GPRS, email y otro servicios para su modelo de teléfono en www .noki ausa.com/p honese ttings . Si aún necesita a yuda, consulte la lis ta local de Centros de Servic io al Cliente Nokia en www.nokiausa.com/cus tomerservice o www. nokiausa.co m/contact_ us . â Registre su teléfono Asegúrese de registrar su teléfono en www .warra nty .nokiausa .com o llame al 1-888-NOK IA-2U (1-888 -665-4228) para pode r servirle mejor si neces ita llamar al centro de servicio o reparar su teléfono. â Boletines electrónicos Al registrar su teléfono, podrá subscribirse al boletÃÂn electrónico de Nokia, Nokia Connections. Recibirá dato s o instru cciones s obre cómo usar su teléf ono, acce sorio y ofert as especiale s.
GarantÃÂa Limi ta da Nokia de Un (1) Año 21 2. Gara ntÃÂa Limit ada Nokia de Un (1) Año Nokia Inc. (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) garantiza que este teléfono celular (âÂÂProducto") está libre de defectos en materiales y mano de obra los cuales generan averÃÂas duran te su uso normal, de acuerdo a los siguientes términos y limitaciones: 1. La garantÃÂa limitada para el Producto cubre UN (1) año a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. El perÃÂodo de garantÃÂa de un año tiene una prórroga dependiendo de cuánto s dÃÂas el Compra dor no tendrá acceso al telé fono debido a la reparación amparada por dicha garantÃÂa. 2. La garantÃÂa limitada ampara al Comprador original ("Comprador") del Producto y no es ni asignable ni transferible a cualquier subsiguiente comprador/consumidor final. 3. La garantÃÂa lim itada ampara únicam ente a los Compradores que hay an comprado el Producto en los Estados Unidos de América. 4. D urante e l perÃÂod o de la garant ÃÂa limita da, Nokia re parará o repo ndrá, a elecci ón de Nokia, cualquier parte o pieza s defectuosas, o que no cumplan apropiadame n te con su func ión original, con partes nuevas o recon struidas si dichas parte s nueva s o rec ons trui das son neces ari as de bido a l ma l funci onamie n to o averÃÂa durante su uso normal. No se aplicará ningún cargo al Comprador por dichas partes. Nokia pagará también los costos de mano de obra que Nokia incurra en la reparación o reemplazo de las partes defectuosas. La ga rantÃÂa limitada no ampara los defectos en hec hura, las partes cosméticas , decorativas o artÃÂculos estructurale s, tampoco el marco, ni cu alquier parte inoperativa. El lÃÂmite de responsabilidad de Noki a bajo la garantÃÂa limitada será el valor actua l en efectivo del Producto en el momento que el Comprador devuelva el Producto para la reparación, que se determina por el precio que el Comprador pagó por el Producto menos una cantidad razonable deduc ida por el tiempo de uso del Producto. Nokia no será responsable de cualquier otra pérdida o perjuicio. Estos remedios son los remedios exclusiv os del Comprador para la violación de la garantÃÂa. 5. A solicitud de Nokia, el Comprador deberá comprobar la fecha de la compra original del Produ cto mediante un resguardo con fecha de la compra del Produc to. 6. El Comprador deberá asumir el costo de transportación del Producto a Nokia. Nokia asumirá el costo del embarque de regreso del Producto al Comprador una vez comp letado el servicio bajo esta garantÃÂa limit ada.
GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1 ) Año 22 7. El Comprador no tendrá derecho a ap licar e sta garant ÃÂa limitada ni a obtener ningún beneficio de la misma si cualquiera de las siguientes condici ones es aplicable : a) El Producto haya sido expuesto a: uso anormal, condiciones anormales, almacenamiento inapropiado, exposició n a la humedad, modificacione s no autorizadas, conexiones no autorizada s, reparaciones no autorizadas, m al uso, descuido, abuso, accidente, alte ración, instalación inadecuada, u otros actos q ue no sea n culpa de Nok ia, inc luyendo d años ocasi onados por e mbarque. b) El Producto haya sido estropeado debido a causas e xternas tales como, colisión con otro objeto, incendios, inundaciones, arena, suciedad, huracán, relám pagos, terre moto o deteri oro causa do por condici ones me teoroló gicas, factores de fuerza mayor o drenaje de baterÃÂa, robo, fusible roto, o uso inapropiado de cualquier fuente de energÃÂa; daños causados por cualquier tipo de virus, errores, gusanos, Caballos de Troya, robo de cancelación (Cancelbots) o perjuicio causado por una conexión a otros productos no recomendados por Nokia para la interconexión. c) Nokia no haya sido avisado por escrito por el Comprador del supuesto o mal funcionamiento de l Producto dentro del perÃÂodo de catorce (14) dÃÂas después de la caducidad del perÃÂodo de la aplicable garantÃÂa limitada. d) La placa de l número de serie del Producto o el código de dato del accesorio haya sido quitado, borrado o alterado. e) El defecto o daño haya sido causado por un funcionamie nto defectuoso del sistema celu lar, o por una inadecua da recepción de señal de la antena exterior, o por cualquier tipo de viru s u otros problemas de software que haya sido introducido en el Producto. 8. Nokia no garantiza ni un funcionam iento ininterrumpido del product o ni una operación sin errores. Si durante el perÃÂodo de la garantÃÂa limitada llegase a desarrollar un problema, el Comprador deberá seguir paso a pas o el siguiente procedimie nto: a) El Comprador deberá devolver el Produ cto al lugar de adquisición para su reparación o proceso de reemplazo. b) Si âÂÂaâ no resulta conveniente debido a la distancia (más de 50 millas) o por cualquier otra bu ena razón, el Com prador deberá embarc ar el Producto prepagado y asegurado a Nokia. P ara saber la dirección del centro de reparación más cercano, visite www .nokiausa.c om/supp ort .
GarantÃÂa Limi ta da Nokia de Un (1) Año 23 c) El Compra dor d eberá i ncluir la direcció n del rem itente, númer o tel efónico (de dÃÂa) y/o núme ro de fa x, una de scripc ión compl eta de l probl ema, resgu ardo de compra y a cuerdo d e servic io (si es aplica ble). Los gastos in curridos para r emover el Producto de una instalación no son cubiertos por esta garantÃÂa limitada. d) El Comprador será responsable de las facturas correspondientes a las partes o la mano de obra no cubiertas por es ta garantÃÂa limitada. El Comprador será responsable de cualquier gasto de reinstalación del Producto. e) Nokia reparará e l Producto bajo la ga rantÃÂa limitada dentro de un plazo de 30 dÃÂas después de la recepción del Producto. Si Nokia no puede realizar la repara ción am parada por e sta garan tÃÂa li mi tada den tro de 30 d ÃÂas, o tras una cant idad ra zon able de inte ntos de repa rar e l mismo de fecto, Nokia ti ene la opció n de pr ovee r un r epues to del Pr oducto o ab onar el pr eci o de c ompra del Produ cto meno s una canti dad razo nable aplicab le al uso. En ci ertos es tado s el Comprad or tendrá derecho a un teléfono pre stado cuando la reparación del producto pue da durar más de diez (10) dÃÂas. Contacte al Centro de Atención Nokia Care al número telefónico que aparece al fi nal de esta garantÃÂa si necesita un teléfono pres tado y si la re paración del Producto tardará/está calculado a tardar más de die z (1 0 ) dÃÂas. f) En caso de qu e el Producto haya sido devuelto a Nokia dentro de l perÃÂodo de la garantÃÂa limitada, pero el problema del Producto no esté cubierto por los términos y condicion es de esta garantÃÂa limitada, el Comprador será notificado y recibirá un presupuest o del costo a pa gar por el Comprador por la reparación del producto y gastos de envÃÂo facturado al Comprador. Si el presupuesto es rechazado, el producto será devuelto al cliente por mensajerÃÂa por cobrar. Si el producto es devuelto a Nokia después de la fecha de vencimiento del plazo de la garantÃÂa limita da, se aplicarán las polÃÂticas norm ales de servicio de Nokia y el Comprador será responsable de todos los gastos de envÃÂo. 9. Usted (el comprador) entiende que el producto consta de un ensamble nuevo que puede contener com ponentes usados los cuales han sido reprocesados. Los componentes usados cumple n las especificaciones de rendimiento y confiabilidad de l Producto. 10. C UALQUIER GARAN TÃÂA IMPLÃÂCITA O MERCANTIL PARA CUALQUIER PROPÃÂSITO O USO PARTICULAR D EBE LIMITARSE A LA DUR ACIÃÂN DE LA ESCRI TA GARANTÃÂA LIMITADA PRECEDENTE. DE OTRA FORMA, LA GARANTÃÂA PRECEDEN TE ES EL ÃÂNICO EXCL USIVO REMEDIO DEL COMPRADOR Y EN LUGAR DE CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÃÂA, EXPRESA O IMPLÃÂCIT A NOKIA NO PODRàSER REQUERI DO POR DAÃÂOS IN CIDENTALES, PUNITIVOS O CON SECUENCIALES O POR PÃÂRDIDAS ANTICIPADAS INCLUY ENDO, PERO SI N LIMITAR, A PÃÂRD IDA DE BENEFI CIOS
GarantÃÂa Limitada Nokia de Un (1 ) Año 24 O GANANCIAS ANTICIPADAS, PÃÂRDIDA DE AHORROS O INGRESOS, DAÃÂOS PUNITIVOS, PÃÂRDIDA DE USO DEL PRODUCTO O DE CUALQUIER OTRO EQUIPO RELACIONADO, COSTO DE CAPITAL, COSTO DE CUAL QUIER EQUIPO O FACILIDAD DE REEMPL AZO, TI EMPO MU ERTO, LAS D EMAND AS DE PER SONAS A TER CERAS INCLUYENDO CLIENTES, Y DAÃÂO A LA PROPIEDAD COMO RESULTADOS DE LA COMPR A O US O DEL PROD UCTO O CAU SADO POR UNA V IOLA CIÃÂN DE LA GARA NTÃÂA DE CONT RATO, NEGLI GENCIA , INDEMN IZACIÃÂN ESTRICTA , O CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÃÂA LEGAL O IMP ARCIAL, AÃÂN CUANDO NOKIA SUPIERA DE LA EXISTENCIA DE DICHO DAÃÂO S, NOKIA NO SERàRESPO NSABLE DE LA DEMORA EN LA APOR T ACIÃÂN DE SERV ICIO BAJO LA GARANTÃÂA L IMITADA, O PÃÂRDIDA DE USO DURANTE EL PERÃÂODO DE LA REPARACIÃÂN DEL PRODUCTO. 11. Algunos esta dos no permiten limitación de duraci ón de una garantÃÂa implÃÂcita, entonces puede que la garantÃÂa limita da de un año no le concierna a usted (el Comprador). Algunos estados no permiten exclusione s o limitaciones de daños incidentales y consecuente s, por lo tanto puede que ciertas limitaciones o exclusiones arriba indicadas no le conciernan a usted (el Comprador). Esta garantÃÂa limitada le concede al Comprador derechos especÃÂficos y legales y puede ser que el Comprador tenga otro s dere chos, los cu ales varÃÂan d e estado a estado. 12. Nokia tampoco asume ni autoriza a cualquier centro de servicio, persona o entidad autorizada que se asumiera para Nokia ninguna otra obligación o responsabilidad que no esté explÃÂcitamente provista en esta garantÃÂa limitada incluyendo al proveedor o al vendedor de cualquier garantÃÂa extendida o acuerdo de servicio. 13. ÃÂsta es la garantÃÂa entera entre Nokia y el Comprador, e in valida todos los contrat os o acue rdos ant eriores y cont empor áneos, v erbales o escrito s, y todas las com unicaci ones r elacionad as al Prod ucto y ningu na repr esentación , prome sa o con dición no me ncion adas en el prese nte modi ficar á estos t érmin os. 14. La garantÃÂa limitada indica el riesgo de falla del Producto entre el Comprador y Nokia. La indicación e s reconocida por el Comprador y se re fleja en el pre cio de venta del Producto. 15. Cualquier gest ión o acción legal relacionada a la garantÃÂa deberá ser iniciada dentro de los dieciocho (18) meses subsecuentes al envÃÂo del Product o. 16. Cu alquier pr egunta con cern iente a esta gara ntÃÂa l imit ada puede d irig irse a: Nokia Inc. Tel.: 1-88 8-NOKIA -2U (1-888-6 65-4228 ) Fax: (813 ) 249-9619 Sólo para usuarios d e TTY/TDD: 1-800-2 4-NOKIA (1-800-246-6 542) Pág. Web: www.nokiausa.com/supp ort
Mensaje de la CTIA 25 3. Mensaje d e la C TIA (Cellular T e lecommunication s & Internet Association) para todos los usuarios de teléfonos celulares é 2001 Cellula r Telecommunic ations & Internet Association. Todos los derechos reservado s.1250 Co nnecticut Av enue, NW Sui te 800, Wa shington, DC 20 036. Teléfono: (202 ) 785-0081 La seguridad es su deber más importante que tendrá que realizar. â Una guÃÂa para el uso responsable y seguro del teléfono celular Hoy dÃÂa millones de personas en los Estados Unidos aprovechan de la com binación única de comod idad, se guridad y valor qu e la tel efonÃÂa celular apo rta. Sen cilla mente, el tel éfono c elula r da a la gente la ha bilida d poder osa de pod er com unicar se po r voz - casi en todos los sitios a cualquier hora - co n el jefe, un c liente, los hijos, en caso de emergencia s o incluso con la policÃÂa . Cada año los ame ricanos hacen m iles de millones de llamadas con sus teléfonos c elulares, y aun la cifra as c iende rápidamente. Pero una responsabilidad importante acompaña esa s ventajas la cual es recon ocida por el usuario de te léfono celular. C uando está con duciendo, su respon sabilidad primordial es conducir. Un teléfono celular puede ser una h erramienta indispensable, no obs tante, el conducto r deberá tener un b uen jui cio todo el tiempo mientras está conduciendo - esté o no esté usando el teléfono. Las lecciones básicas son aquellas que habÃÂamos aprendido cuando é ramos jóvenes. El conducir requie re agilidad, precaución y cortesÃÂa. Necesita mucho sentido co mún - man tenga la cabeza en posi ción norm al, dirija la vista hacia el traye cto, comp ruebe los visore s con frecue ncia y prec aución con los demás conductor es. Deberá respetar toda s las señales de tráfico y man ten ers e dentr o del lÃÂmit e de velo cida d. De berá abro charse el cint urón de segu ridad y r eque rir que los otros pasajero s hagan lo mism o. Pero con el teléfono celular, el c onducir significa algo más. Este folleto es una lla mada a todos los usuarios de teléfonos celulares en todos los sitios para que la se g uridad sea su prioridad cuando están detrás d el volante. La tele comunica ción celu lar sirve pa ra ponerno s en contacto , simplificar nuestra vi da, protegernos durant e una emergencia y pr ovee rnos la oportunidad de poder ayudar a los demás. En cuanto al uso del teléfono celular, la seguridad es su deber más importante.
Mensaj e de la CTIA 26 â "GuÃÂas de seguridad sobre el uso del Teléfono Celular" A continuación, se r eflejan las guÃÂas de seguridad a seguir mientras está conduciendo y usan do un t eléfono celular las cual es deber ÃÂan ser fáciles de r ecord ar. 1. Conozca bien su teléfono celular y sus funci ones, tales como la marcación ráp ida y rediscado. Lea detenidam ente su manual de instruccio nes y aprenda a optimizar las opcio nes qu e el te léfono pueda ofrec er, inc luyendo rediscado auto mático y la memo ria. Tambié n, aprenda de memor ia el tec lado para pode r usar la func ión de marca ción rá pida s in la nece sidad d e quit ar la v ista d e la carret era. 2. Cuando esté disponible, use la función m anos libres. Hoy dÃÂa se dispone de una cantidad de accesori os manos libres. Aunque elija el dispositivo de montaj e instalado para su teléfono celular o un microteléfono, aprove che los dispositivos disponibles. 3. C o loque su telé fono c elular para un alcan ce fá cil. Ase gúre se de ub icar s u telé fono celul ar a la ma no, do nde lo pue da lev antar sin t ener que qu itar la vi sta de la carrete ra. Cua ndo entre una lla mada, si es po sible, que su buzón de v oz lo responda. 4. Posponga cualquier conversación mientra s esté conduciendo en una situación muy peligrosa. Como conductor, su respons a bilidad es prestarle atenci ón al tráfico. DÃÂgale a la otra p e rsona que usted e stá co nduciendo; si fue ra necesario, c ancele la llamada en embotellamientos o dura n te situaciones peligrosas d e tiempo. La lluvia, aguaniev e, nieve y hielo pu eden ser ta n peligros as como l os embo tellami entos. Como conductor, su re sponsabilidad es prestarle at ención al tr áfico. 5. No tome notas o busque números telefónicos cuando esté conduciendo. Si está leyendo un director io o tarjeta de negocio, o escribi endo una lista de "tareas" mientras está conduciendo, no estará al tanto de su ruta. Es caso de sentido común. No se involuc re en situaciones de tráfico pe ligrosas debido a que usted esté leyendo o escribie ndo sin prestar ate nción al tráfico y a los vehÃÂculos cercanos. 6. M arque con sensatez y esté al tanto del trá fico; si fuera posible, haga la s llamadas cuando esté estacionado o retirado de la carretera antes de hablar. Tra te de pla near sus llamadas antes de emprender el viaje para que sus llam adas coincidan con las señales de Stop, semáforo s en rojo o estacionam ientos. Pero, si es preciso h acer una llamada m ientras esté conduciendo, sig a esta norma sencilla: m arque unos pocos números, compruebe la carretera y sus visores, y lue go continúe. 7. E vite conver sacion es estr esante s y emotiv as que pu edan distr aer la atención. No se pueden combinar el conduci r y las conversaci ones emotivas y estresantes - es muy peligroso c uando está detrás del volante. Que la persona con quien e stá hablando sepa que usted está conduciendo, y si es neces ario, evite co nversacio nes de distracción.
Mensaje de la CTIA 27 8. Utilice su teléfono celular para pedir socorro. Su teléfono celula r es una de las mejores herram ientas que pu ede adquirir para protegerse a usted y a su familia en s itu acio nes pel igro sas - c on su te léfon o a su lad o te ndr á el soc orr o a su a lcan ce con sólo la marcac ión de tres números. Marque 9-1-1 o el núme ro local de emergencia en caso de incendio, accidente de tráfico, peligro en la carretera o emergencia médi ca. Recuerde, áes una lla mada gratis en su teléfono celu lar! 9. Use su teléfono celular para ayudar a los demás en tiempo de emergencia. Su teléf ono celula r le brind a la op ortuni dad perf ecta p ara se r "un bu en samarit a no" en su comunidad. En situaciones de accidente de tráfico, crÃÂmenes u otras emergencias de vida, llame al 9-1-1 o el núme ro local de emergencia, como usted quiere que los demás hagan por usted. 10. Cuando s ea necesario, llame al centro de asistencia de tráfico u otro número celular de ayuda para situaciones que no son de emergencia. Puede encontrar ciertas situaci ones cuando esté co nduciend o las cua les no merec en la necesidad de referirlas a los servicios de em ergencia. Pero sàpuede usar su teléfon o celular para echar una mano. Si ve un automóvil que no corre en medio de la carretera aunque no signifiq ue ningún peligro, seña les rotas de tráfic o, un accidente de tráfico sin nin gún herido, o un vehÃÂc u lo robado, llame a la asistencia o a otros números especiales de teléfonos celulares en situaciones que no son de em erge ncia. Las personas irresponsables, de scuida das, distraÃÂdas y los que conduzcan irresponsablemente representan un peligro en la carretera. Al acercarnos hacia un siglo nuevo, más ge nte se aprove chará de las ve ntajas de l os teléfonos celulare s. Desde el año 1984, la Asociación de la Industria de Telec omunicacion es Celulares (CTIA) y la industria celular han realizad o asistencia educativa para inform ar a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares de su responsabilidad siend o conductores cautelosos y buen os ciud adanos. Al acerca rnos hacia un sigl o nuevo , más gen te se apr ovechará de las ventajas de los teléfonos celulares. Y, al dirigirnos a la c arretera, todos tenemo s la r esponsabi lidad de conducir con cautela . La in dustria celular l e recue rda utilizar c on seguridad su telé fono mien tras conduce . Para más informac ión, llame a 1 -888-901-SAFE . Para datos actualizados, visite: http: //www.wow-c om.com/co nsume r/issues/dr ivi ng/a rticl es.c fm?ID =85
Mensaj e de la FDA 28 4. M ensaj e de la FDA U.S. Food an d Drug Administr ation (FDA ) para todos los usua rios de telé fono s cel ula res. Para informa ción actualiza da, visite http://ww w .fda.gov/ce llphones/. ÿSign ifican un pelig ro para la salu d los telé fonos celula res? La evidencia cientÃÂfica disponible no muest ra que ningún problema de salud tiene relación con el uso de teléfonos celulares. No hay pruebas, sin embargo, que los teléfonos celula res son absolutamen te seguros. Los teléfono s celulares emiten niveles bajos de radiofrecuencia (RF) en la gama de microonda durante el uso. También emiten nivele s muy bajos de RF en modalidad de inactividad. Mientras que los niveles altos de RF pu eden influir la salud (por calen tamiento) la exposición a un nivel b ajo d e RF no pr oduce efecto s de calentamie nto y no causa ef ectos adv ersos a la sa lud. Much os estud ios sobre exposic iones a nivel b ajo de RF no ha n enc ontrado efectos biológicos. Ciertos es tudios han sugerido que podrÃÂan resultar en ciertos efectos biológicos, pero tales encuestas no han sido confirmadas por estudios adicionales. En ciertos casos, otros inv estigadores han tenido d ificultades para reproducir tales estudios o determinar las causas de los res ultados incon sistentes. ÿCuá l es el pap el de la FD A co ncern iente a la seg uridad de lo s te léfon os ce lular es? Bajo la ley, la FDA no revis a la seguri dad de los productos que generan radiación, tales como, teléfonos celulares antes de su ven ta, como se hacen con medicamentos o dispositivos médicos nuevos. Sin embarg o, la ag encia tiene l a autor idad p ara realizar una acción si es mostrado que el nivel de la radiofrecuencia ( RF) emitida por los teléfonos c elulares muestra algún peligro para el usuario. En tal caso, la FDA podrÃÂa requerir a los fabricantes de teléfono s celulares que avisen a los usuarios del peligro de los teléfonos celulare s para la salud, y que reparen, o devuelvan los teléfonos para que el ya peligro no e xista. Aunque los dat os cientÃÂficos existe ntes no justific an las acciones reglam entarias de la FDA, la FDA le exige a la industria de t eléfonos celulares qu e establezca medida s, que incluyan las siguientes: ⢠Respaldar la invest igación necesaria h acia los posibles efectos biológicos del tipo de RF generada por teléfonos celulares; ⢠Diseñar los teléfono s celulares de tal manera que minimicen la ex posición del usuario a un nivel RF necesario para el funciona miento del dispositi vo; y ⢠Colaborar en la tare a de proveerles a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares la mayor información posible sobre los resulta dos generados por el uso de los teléfonos celulares en cu anto a la salud.
Mensaj e de la FDA 29 La FDA pertenece a un grupo de interagencias de las agencias federales que se encargan de los distintos aspectos de la seguridad de la RF para ase gurar los esfuerzos coordinados al nivel federal. Las agencias siguientes pertenecen a este grupo: ⢠National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health ⢠Environment al Protection Agency ⢠Federal Com munications Comm ission ⢠Occupational Safety and Heal th Administ ration ⢠National Telecom munications and Information Adm inistration El National Institute of Health participa tambié n en actividades del grupo interagenc ia. La FDA compart e con la Federal Commun ications Comm ission (FCC) las responsabilidades para teléfonos celulares. Todos los teléfono s celulares vendidos en los Estados Unidos deben cumplir con los reglamentos establecidos por la FCC que limitan la exposi ción RF. La FCC depend e de la FDA y otras agen cias sanitari as sobre los asuntos de seguridad de los teléfonos celulares. La FCC también re gulariza las estacione s base de donde dependen las redes de teléfonos c elulare s. Mientras estas e staciones de base funcionan con una pot encia más alta que los propios teléfonos celulare s, la exposición RF que el usuario podrÃÂa recibir de dichas estaciones bases es, en general, mucho más reducida que la RF generada por los teléfonos celulare s. Las es taciones de base no son el asunt o de las preguntas de seguridad tratadas en este documento. ÿQué está re aliza ndo la FDA para saber má s sobre los res ulta dos posibl es en la salud causad os por te léfonos cel ulares? Junto con la entidad U.S. National Toxicology Program y con otros grupos de investiga dores mundiales, la FDA está trabajando para asegurar que se e stán conducie ndo estudios altame nte prioritari os en animales para dirigir preguntas sobre los efectos de la exposición RF. La FDA ha sido e l participante lÃÂder en el proyecto Int ernational Elec tromagnetic Fields (EMF) desde su inicio en el 1996 , de la entidad World Health Organization. Como result ado poderoso de este trabajo se desar rolló una a genda detallad a de las nece sidades e n la in ves tigac ión qu e propuls ó el establecimiento de programas nuevos de investigaciones por todo el mundo. El proyec to ta mbién h a ayudad o a de sarrollar una ser ie de do cument os de i nformac ión pública sobre los asun tos EMF. La FDA y la Cellula r Telecommunica tions & Int ernet Association (CTIA) conducen un acuerdo formal denomin ado Cooperative Research and Developmen t Agreement (CRADA) para realizar investigacio nes de la seguridad en el uso del teléfon o celular. La FDA provee una v ista cientÃÂfica, consiguiendo las opiniones de los expertos de las orga nizaci ones académicas, i ndustriales y
Mensaj e de la FDA 30 guber namen tale s. La inves tigac ión fin anci ada po r la C TIA e s rea lizada por c ontra tos con inves tigadores independie ntes. La investiga ción inicial incluirá ta nto los experimentos en laboratorios como los estudios sobre usua rios de teléfonos celu lares . El pro yect o CRADA tam bién v a a a sesor ar amp liame nte los requ erimi entos en los estudios bajo el conte xto de los desarrollos de las investigaciones más reci entes por todo el mundo. ÿQué medidas puedo re alizar para re ducir la ra diofre cuen cia irrad iada p or mi teléfo no ce lular a la que es toy exp uesto ? Si existe algún riesgo de estos productos - y en este moment o desconocemos tal existencia - probablemente será muy mÃÂni mo. Sin embargo, si le concierne la prevención de posible s riesgos, haga estos pasos sencillos para minim izar la radiof recuen cia (RF). Pu esto qu e el t iempo es un factor c lave, en cuanto al ni vel de la exposición que una persona pueda reci bir, minimizar el tiempo de uso del teléfono celular redu cirá la exposición a la RF. Si tiene que extender su tiempo de conver saci ón con su teléfono celular, podrá alejarse del or igen de la RF, pu esto qu e el nivel d e exposi ción RF r educirá d epen diendo de la distanc ia. Por ejempl o, podrá u tilizar un aur icular y llevar el celu lar ap artado de su cuerpo o u sar un te léfono celu lar conectado a una a ntena rem ota. Se reitera que los datos cie ntÃÂficos no muestran que los teléfonos celulare s son peligrosos. Sin embargo, si le concierne la prevención de posibles riesgos, podrá adoptar las medidas antes mencionadas para reducir el nivel de exposición a la RF que se origina de los teléfonos celulares. ÿSigni fica un ries go para lo s niño s el uso de t eléfo nos ce lulares ? Las evidencias cientÃÂficas no muestra n peligro a los usuarios de teléfonos celulares, incluso para los niños y jóvenes. Si desea re alizar las medidas para reducir la exposición a la radiofrecuencia (RF ), las medidas an teriormente menciona das servirÃÂan para los niños y jóvenes que usan teléfonos celulares. Reducir del tiempo de uso del celular y aumentar la distancia entre el usuario y el origen de la radiofrecuencia minimizará la ex posición a la RF. Ciertos grupos patrocinados por otras entidades nacionales guberna mentales han rec omendado que los niños no utilicen teléfonos celulares. Por ejemplo, en diciembre 2000, el gobierno del Reino Unido distribuyó folletos conteniendo dic ha recomendación . Se han dado cuenta que no existen ning una e viden cia qu e el us o de te léfono s celu lare s pued a caus ar tu mores cere brales u otras enferm edades. Su re comendación de qu e los niños limiten e l uso de los teléfo nos ce lulares fu e sola mente a efecto prev entivo; no fue bas ada en nin guna evidencia de peligros para la salud.
Mensaj e de la FDA 31 ÿReduce el riesgo d e la expo sición a l a radiofrecuenc ia el uso de acces orios manos li bres c o n teléf onos celular es? Puesto que no existen riesgos a exposición RF irradiada por teléfonos celulares, no hay motivo para creer que el uso de equipos manos libres reducen los riesgos. Se pueden usa r los equipos manos libres co n los teléfonos celulares por ra zones de como didad y confort . Estos sistem as redu cen la po sibilidad de qu e la ca beza abso rba la radiofrecuen cia puesto que el teléfono , de donde se emite la radiofrecue ncia, se usa lejos de la cabeza. Por otro lado, si el teléfon o se lleva en la cintura o en otra parte del cuerpo durante su uso, entonces esa parte del cuerpo absorberá más la energÃÂa radiofrecuencia. Se requieren qu e los teléfonos celulares vendid os en Estados Unidos cumpla n co n las medidas de seguridad sin importar si son usados contra la cabeza o portados con cualquie r parte del cuerpo. Cualquiera de la configuración de ben cumplir con los lÃÂmites de seguridad. ÿSir ven com o deben los acceso rios de te léfono s que son pr omocion ados co mo protec tor para la cabe za contra la radi ación em itida po r RF? Puesto que no existen riesgos de exposic ión a la radiofre cuencia emitida por los teléfonos ce lulares, no hay motivo pa ra creer que los accesorios que protegen la cabeza contra dichas emisiones de verdad reducen los riesgos. Ciertos productos que son promocionados como protectores contra la radiofrecuencia usan fundas especiales para teléfonos, mie ntras hay los que no te ngan blindaje má s que acce sorios metálicos adju ntados al teléfono. Según la s investigaciones, en genera l estos productos no funcionan como son promoc ionados. Estos denominados "blindajes", no como los equipos "manos libres", podrÃÂa n interferir con la operación debida del teléfono. El telefóno podr ÃÂa ser provocado a elevar su potencia que podrÃÂa incrementar la absorción de radiofrecuencia. En febrer o 2002, la entidad Federal Trade Commission (FTC) denunció dos empresas que vendieron dispositivos que, como ellas alegaban, protegÃÂan a los usua rios de teléfonos celulares c ontra la irradiación e hicier on declaracione s falsas y reclamaciones no confirm adas. Según la FTC, estos demanda dos carecÃÂan de una base razonable para respaldar su de manda. ÿCómo ase sora FCC la radiofr ecuencia de un teléfono cel ular? Después de otorgar la licencia de mercadeo de un teléfono celula r particular, la FCC reali za, de vez en cua ndo, prue bas "pos t-gra nt" (despu és de otor gar) para det ermin ar si la producción de lo s modelos del teléfono están cumplie ndo los requerimientos estipulados por la FCC. Al fabricante de un teléfono c elular que no reúna los requerimiento s estipulados por la FCC se le puede requerir que retire el uso del teléfono celular y que abone el costo de la compra o que reponga el teléfono, y podrÃÂa ser somet ido a sanc iones delict ivas o civ iles. Además, si el teléfono si gnifica un riesgo de peligro para el usuario, la FDA también puede realizar una acción regulatoria. La prueba "post-grant" má s importante, desde la perspectiva del
32 consumidor, es la de las irradiaciones RF del teléfono. FC C mide el nivel de Specific Absorption Rate (SAR-TAE - Tasa de Absorción EspecÃÂfica) del teléfono, siguiendo un protocolo de pruebas muy riguroso. Co mo ocurre con casi cualquie r medición cientÃÂfica, es po sible que la medición de prueba pueda ser menos o más de la RF actual irradiada por el teléfono. Esta diferencia entre la medición de prueba de RF y la radiación RF actual es debido al hecho de que las mediciones de pruebas son limit adas po r la aut entic idad d el instr umen to, pues to que los ento rnos de la med ición de prueba y del uso actual son diferentes, y por otros factores variables. Esta variación inherente es denominad o "incertidumbre de medición". C uando FCC cond uce una medición "post-grant" de un teléfono celular, FCC se toma en cuenta de cualquier incertidumbre pa ra determinar la nece sida d de una acción regulatoria. Este paso asegura que cuando FCC toma acc iones regulatorias, éstas tendrán una base cient ÃÂfica defendibl e y exacta . El personal FDA revisó la metodologÃÂa usad a por FCC para medir la RF del teléfono celular, y estuvo de acuerdo que es un paso aceptable, en vista de nuestro entendimiento actual de los riesgos de las irradiaciones RF de los teléfonos celulares. No se ha dem ostrado que las irradiaciones RF de los teléfonos celulares presentan un riesgo dañino al usuario cuando la medida SAR es menos de los lÃÂmites de seguridad estipulados por FCC (un SAR de 1.6 w/kg). Aunque la medida máxima de incertidumbre permitid a por las normas actuales de medición fue agregada al norma máxima permitida por SAR, el valor resultante de SAR podrÃÂa aparecer menos que cualquier nivel que pueda producir un resultado agudo. Consiguiente mente, el pa so de FCC con incert idumbre de medición no re sultará en exponer a los usuarios a cual quier ri esgo de la RF irradiada p or los teléfo nos celula res. La FDA continúa a monitore ar los estudios y literatura de reportes referentes a los efectos severos de la RF de los teléfonos celulares, y referentes a los efectos crónicos de exposición a largo plazo a la RF del teléfono celular (es decir, los rie sgos que emanan del uso de teléfonos celulares por muchos años). En caso de que una nueva información da indicio a FDA a creer que un cam bio en la polÃÂt ica de medida de F CC podrÃÂa ser apropiado, FDA se pondrá en c ontacto con FCC y ambas agencias trabajarán juntam ente para des arrollar un paso mutu almente aceptabl e. Actualizado 29 de julio de 2003 Printed in / Impreso en 06/06
Contents For your safety ... .............................. .......... 7 Get connected .......................................... 10 Support .............................. ....................... 11 Nokia support and contact info rmation .......... ......... .... 11 Help ........ ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 11 Get started ................... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... ....... 11 Additional applications ...... ...................... .................. ....... 11 Your Nokia N76 . ...................................... 12 Software updates ............ ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... 12 Settings ............ ........... ..................... ........... ......... ........... ....... 12 Welcome .............. ............ ........... .................... ............ ........... 12 Modes .......... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ............. 12 Keys and navigation ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... 14 Transfer content from another de vice .......... .............. .. 16 Essential indicators....... ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... 17 Power saver LED ................... ......... ........... ........... ............ .... 18 Volume and loudspeaker cont rol .................. ........... ....... 18 Keypad lock (key guard) ............ ............ ........... ........... ....... 18 Headset ..... ........... ..................... ......... ......... ........... ......... ....... 18 Memory card ...... ..................... ........... ......... ............ ........... .. 19 File manager .............. ............ .................... ........... ............... 19 Media applications .... .............................. 21 Music player ............ ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... .......... 21 Visual Radio ........ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 25 RealPlayer ....... ........... .................................. .................. ...... 27 Adobe Flash Player ......... ........... .................................. ...... 28 Nokia Lifeblog ......... ........... .................................. ......... ...... 28 Camera ........................ .............................. 29 Take pictures ............ ........... ..................... ........... ......... ........ 29 Still image camera indicators ....... ........... .................. ...... 30 Active toolbar ............... ............ ............................. ......... ...... 31 After taking a picture ................... ........... ....................... ... 31 Still image camera settin gs...................... .................. ...... 32 Flash ............ ......... ........... .......... ........... .................... ......... ...... 33 Setup settingsâÂÂcolor and lighting .. ............ ........... ........ 33 Scenes ........ ........... ..................... ......... ........... ......... ............ ... 34 Take pictures in a seque nce ................... ........... ............ ... 34 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer .......... ............ ........... ........ 35 Record videos .................. ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... . 35 Gallery ...................................... ............... 38
View and browse files ................... ............ ........... ........... ... 38 Print Basket ............. ......... ............ ........... ..................... .........40 Albums .................... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 40 Free memory .................. ............ ........... .................... ............40 Image prin t ............ ..................... ......... ........... .................... ... 41 Print online ............ ........... ............ ........... ..................... ......... 42 Online sharing ........... ........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 42 Edit images ................. ........... .................... ............ ........... ..... 42 Edit video clips ............ ........... ....................................... .......43 Slide show ............. ........... .................................. ............ ....... 43 Presentation s ................... ..................... ........... ......... ............44 Movie director ........ ............ ......... ........... ........... ................... 44 Personalize your device .......................... 47 ProfilesâÂÂset tones ................ ............ ........... ......... ........... ... 47 Change the look of your device .............................. ....... 48 Active standby mode ..... ............ .................................. ....... 49 Web browser ............... ........................... 51 Connection security ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... ..... 51 Bookmarks v iew ................. ......... ........... ......... ............ .........51 Browse the w eb ................. ........... ......... ........... ................... 52 End connection ........... ........... ............ .................... ........... ... 55 Settings ................ ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ..... 56 Connections .......................... ................... 58 Connection manager .............. ........... ........... ..................... 58 Bluetooth connectivity ................ ............ ........... ........... ... 58 USB ........... ......... ........... .................... ......... ............ ................ 61 PC connections .................. ........... .................... ............ ....... 62 Synchronization ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ... 62 Device manager .................... ............ ......... ........... ........... ... 62 Download! .................................. .............63 Settings for Download!........ ............ ........... ........... ............ 63 Time management ............... .................... 65 Clock ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ..... 65 Calendar .... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 65 Messaging .................................. .............67 Text modes ............ ........... .................................. ............ ....... 68 Write and send messa ges ................... ....................... ....... 68 InboxâÂÂreceive me ssages ........... ........... ......... ............ ....... 69 Mailbox .......... ............ ...................... .............................. ....... 71 View messages on a SIM card ............. ....................... ..... 72 Messagin g settings .................. ......... ........... ......... ........... ... 73 IMâÂÂinstant messaging ..................... ........... ............ ......... 77 Make calls ..... ...................................... .....78 Voice calls ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... .............. 78 Video calls ........... ........... ............ .................... ........... ......... ... 80 Video sharing............... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... ..... 82
Answer or decline a call .................. ........... ............ ........... 84 Log .......... ......... ........... ......... ............ ......... ........... ......... ......... 85 Push to talk ................ ............ .................... ............ ........... .. 86 Contacts (phonebook) .................... ........88 Save and edit names a nd numbers ......................... ....... 88 Copy contacts .................. ........... ............ .................... ......... 89 Add ringing tones for contacts .............. ............ ............. 90 Create contact groups .............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 90 Office .................. ...................................... 91 Calculator ....... ......... ........... ......... ............ ........... .................. 91 Adobe Reader ....... ...................... ....................... ........... ....... 91 Converter ... ......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ..................... .. 91 Notes .... ........... ......... ........... ..................... ......... ........... ......... 92 Recorder ....... ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ .................... 92 Wireless Keyboard ................ ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 92 Tools .................... .............................. ........93 Application manager ...... ............ ........... ........... ......... ....... 93 Digital rights management ......... ........... .................. ....... 95 Voice commands ...... ............ ........................................ ...... 96 Positionin g .................. ............ .................... ......... ........... ...... 97 Settings .................................... ............... 98 General ...... ........... ..................... ........... ..................... ........... . 98 Positionin g .................. ............ .................... ......... ........... ....103 Phone ........ ......... ........... .......... ........... ......... ........... ......... .... 103 Connection ............ ......... ........... ......... ........... ....................105 Applications ........... ...................... ....................... ......... ...... 108 Troubleshooting: Q&A ......................... 109 Battery information .......... ................... 112 Charging and discharging.............. ........... ............ ..........112 Nokia battery authe ntication guidelines ...................112 Care and maintenance ......................... 115 Additional safety information . ............ 117 Index ............ ...................................... .... 120
7 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUEL ING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessa rily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMEN TS AND BATTER IES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
8 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompat ible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter th e emergency number, then press the ca ll key. Give your lo cation. Do not end the call until gi ven permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is app roved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, a nd 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for mor e information abo ut networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like computer s, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmfu l content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To incr ease the security of your device, consider installing, us ing, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 97, 2000, and XP). Not all f ile formats ca n be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data co nnection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have preinstalled bookmark s and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also ac cess other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not
9 affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These featur es are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur se rvice provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what c harges will apply. Some networ ks may have limitati ons that af fect how you can use network services. For instance, some network s may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabl ed or not activat ed in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider f or more information . This device supports WAP 2. 0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the ba ttery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a AC-3, or AC-4 charger and from an AC- 1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with a CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-4B. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approv ed enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Get connected 10 Get connected Use your device on the 2G and 3G networks. See About your device, p. 8. Use Bluetooth technology to tr ansfe r files and c onnect to compatible enhancements. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. Use the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) to connect to compatible headsets and hea dphones. See âÂÂHeadsetâÂÂ, p. 18. Use a compatible data cable, for example the Nokia Connectivity Cable DKE-2, to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61. Use a compatibl e microSD ca rd to transfer dat a or back up information. See âÂÂMemory card toolâÂÂ, p. 19.
Support 11 Support Model number: Nokia N76-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N76. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website for the latest version of this guide, additional information, downloads, and services related to your Nokia product. On the website, you can get information on the use of Nokia products and services. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nok ia contact centers at www.nokia.com/customerservice. For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia servi ce center at www.nokia.com/repair. Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired applicati on to view its help t opics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information and instructions for setting up the device f or use. Additional applications There are various applicatio ns provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers to help you do more with your Nokia N76. Th ese applications are explained in the guides that are available at the Nokia N76 product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e.
Your Nokia N76 12 Your Nokia N76 Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband inte rnet access , and a compatib le data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, a nd mobile internet settings auto matically configured in the device, based upon your wi reless service provider information . You may have settings from you r service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the service providers as a special message. To change the general settings in your device, such as language, the standby mode and display settings, see âÂÂPhoneâÂÂ, p. 103. Welcome When you switch on your device for the first time, Welcome opens. Select from the following: Settings wizard âÂÂto configure various settings. Data transfer âÂÂto transfer content, such as contac ts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See âÂÂTransfer content from another deviceâÂÂ, p. 1 6. To open Welcome later, press , and select Applications > Welcome . You can also access the individual applications in their own menu locations. Modes Your device has two operating modes: with the fold closed for access to particular features including Music player , Radio , Camera and Me ssaging , and with the fold open for traditional mobile phone use and access to all the featur es on your device.
Your Nokia N76 13 Fold closedâÂÂcover display When the fold is cl osed, the main display deactivates, and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls end, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a compatible headset is connected. To change the settings, see âÂÂCov er displayâ p. 49. If you are using Music player or Visual Radio to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play . With the fold closed, the cover display provides clock and status information. In the standby mode, the signal strength and battery indicators, time information, and the status indicators may be displayed. If you are u sing Music player to listen to a sound clip, volume bars and track information are displayed. To play, pause, or play the next or previous sound clip, use the quick cove r keys. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. If you are using Visual Radio with the fold cl osed, volume bars and station information are displayed. To turn the radio on or off and select the next or pr evious saved station, use the media keys. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. If you are usin g Camera with the fold closed, hold the device in landscape. The outer display becomes the viewfinder. To activate the camer a, press and hold . To zoom in or out, press the volume keys up or down. To take a picture, press . T o switch between Image mode and Video mode , press . To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, press to activate the toolbar, and use the volume keys to scroll through the active toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. Calendar and clock alarms, no tes for missed calls, and new received messages are also di splayed. To view received text messages and the text an d image objects of received multimedia messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main disp lay. See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 69. Incoming calls are indica ted by their normal tone and a note. In the cover display setti ngs, select Answer if fold opened to answer a call when you open the fold. If a compatible headset is connect ed to the device, press . To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 49. To make calls or use the me nu, open the fold. To lock the keys, see âÂÂKeypad lock (keyguard)âÂÂ, p. 18.
Your Nokia N76 14 Fold openâÂÂmain display When you open the fold, the main display lights up, the keypad is available, and you can access the menu. To access the menu, press . The fold opens about 165 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more. Keys and navigation See the get started guide for a complete list of all the keys and parts in your device. Menu key With the menu key, you can access the main menu. In an open application, press to make the application run in the background. To swi tch between open ap plications, press and hold . Navi⢠scroll key Hereinafter referred to as the scroll key. Use the scroll key to mov e around the menus ( , , , ), and to select items ( ). Tip! When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, , and to quickly access the applications. Fo r example, in the main menu, press to ope n Calendar . Multimedia key With the multimedia key, you have quick a ccess to multimedia content and predefined applications. To open the shortcut assigned to the mult imedia key, press and hold . To open a list of multimedia applications, press . To open the desired application, use the scroll key. To exit the list without selecting an application, press . To change the shortcuts, press and . To change the applications that are shown when you press , select Top , Left , Middle , and Right and the applicati on. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them. Edit key To copy and paste text, press and hold to select letters and words. Press or to highlight text. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To
Your Nokia N76 15 insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release . In Messaging , use the edit key to turn predictive text on, enter in the number mode, insert a symbol, and change the writing language. See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67. Mode key The mode key is a mult ifunction key, allowing y ou to switch easily between select ed applications, and change the views within certain applications when the fold is closed. With the fold open, press to o pen the latest photo in Gallery . With the fold open, in Gallery , press to swi tch between Images & video and thumbnail views. With the fold closed, in Camera , press to switch between Image mode and Video mode . With the fold closed, in Music player , press to switch between Now playin g and Music library . With the fold closed, in Visual Radio , press to switch between channel and channel list views. Tip! To only see the wallpaper on the cover display, press the mode key twice in the standby mode. Capture key Press and hold to activat e the main camera in the fold-closed mode. Press to take pictures. See âÂÂTake picturesâÂÂ, p. 29. In Video mode , press to record video clips. See âÂÂRecord videosâÂÂ, p. 35. Quick cover keys Use the quick cover keys ( , , and ) to control playba ck. See âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 21, and âÂÂVisual RadioâÂÂ, p. 25. Use the quick cover keys to lock the keypad with the fold closed. See âÂÂKeypad lock (keyguard)âÂÂ, p. 18. Press to activate the acti ve toolbar when using the camera in the fold-closed mode. See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. Volume keys To control the volume, see âÂÂVolume and loudspeaker controlâÂÂ, p. 18.
Your Nokia N76 16 Use the volume keys to scroll up or down in a list in the fold-closed mode. Use the volume keys to zoom in and out when using the camera. You can also use the volume keys t o scroll through the active toolbar with the fold clos ed. See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. Transfer content from another device You can transfer con tent, such as contacts, f rom a compatible Nokia device to your Nokia N76 using Bluetooth connectivity. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If the other device supports synchronization, you can also synchronize data be tween the other device and your Nokia N76. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When Nokia N76 is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content 1 To use the application for the first time, on your Nokia N76, select it in Welcome , or press , and select Tools > Transfer . If you have used the application before and want to star t a new transfer, select Transfer data . 2 To have Nokia N76 search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. On your Nokia N76, enter a code (1âÂÂ16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. For some phone models, the transfer application is sent to the other device as a message. To install Data transfer on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 3 From your Nokia N76, selec t the content you want to transfer from the other device. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding locat ion in your Nokia N76. Transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel the transfer and continue later. If the other device supports synchronization, you can keep the data up-to-date in both devices. To start a synchronization with a compatible Nokia device, select Phones , scroll to the device, and select Options > Synchronise . Follow the instructions on the display.
Your Nokia N76 17 The synchronization is two-way. If a n item is d eleted in one device, it is deleted in bot h. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronization. To view the log of a previous transf er, select Transfer log . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You ha ve one or mor e unread me ssages in th e Inbox folder in Messagin g . You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sen t in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is ac tive. The second phone line is be ing used (network service). All calls to t he device are diverted to another number. If you have two phon e lines (network service), a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. indicates the connection has been lost. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible Text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is av ailable. The icons indicate that EGPRS is av aila ble in the network, but your device is not necessarily usin g EGPRS in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. Bluetooth connectivity is on. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB connection is active.
Your Nokia N76 18 Power saver LED The display is switched off to save battery power after the screen saver is actived. A bl ue LED in the bottom of the cover display blinks to indicate that the device is powered on, but in the sleep mode. To turn the sleep mode on or off, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 99. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume l evel when you h ave an active call or are listening to a sound, press the volume keys. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because th e volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Opt ions > Activate loudsp eaker . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate handset . Keypad lock (keyguard) To lock the keys with the fold closed, press , then . To unlock the keys, press , then . To lock the keys with the fold open, press , then . To unlock the keys, press , then . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage so urce to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay speci al attention to volume levels.
Your Nokia N76 19 Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. To use a headset or headphones with a compatible remote control unit, for example, th e Nokia Audio Controller AD- 43, connect the unit to the connector in the device, then to the headset or headphones to the unit. Some headsets do not include a microphone. For phone calls, use such a headset with a remote control unit or the microphone of the device. When using certain headset enhancements, for example the Nokia Audio Controller AD-43, to adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key in the device. The Nokia Audio Controller AD-43 has multimedia vo lume controls that are used to adjust the volume only for music or video playback. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards approved by Nok ia for use with th is device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this device. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the device and corrupt data stored on the card. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Memory card tool Press , and s elect Tools > Memory . To back up information from the device memory to a compatible memory card (if available), select Option s > Back up phone memory . The device notifies you if the memory card does not have en ough fr ee space to create a back- up. To restore information from the compatible memory card to the device memory , select Options > Restore from card . When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others requir e formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must for mat the memory card before you can use it. To format a memory card, select Opt ions > Format memory card . Select Yes to confirm. File manager To browse files and folders in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted), press , and select To ols > File mgr. . The device memory view ( )
Your Nokia N76 20 opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ), if available. To mark several files, pres s and hold while yo u press , , or . To move or copy the files to a folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory from which to search. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Memory details . The amount of available free memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies yo u if the device or the memory card memory is low. To free device memory, tran sfer data to a compatible memory card (if av ailable) or to a compatib le PC. To remove data to free memory, use File manager to delete files you no longer n eed, or go to the re spective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Applications shown in App. manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis) of a pplications you have installed to a compatible memory card; first back up the installation files to a compati ble PC
Media applications 21 Media applications Music player Music player supports files fo rmats such as AAC, eAAC, eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Mus ic player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file format s. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. You can listen to music with the fold open or closed. If you are listening to music when a call comes in, the music pauses when you answer the call and resumes shortly after the end of the call. For how to add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer musicâÂÂ, p. 23. For more information about copyright protection, see âÂÂDigital rights managementâÂÂ, p. 95. Play music To play music with the fold open, do the following: 1 Press and se lect Music p layer . 2 In Music menu , select a category such as All songs or Albums . 3 Select the music you want to play. In Now playing , use the scroll key and the middle selection key to control p layback ⢠Press to play or pause a song. ⢠Press to rewind the tr ack or to s kip backwards. ⢠Press to fast forward the track or to skip forward. ⢠Press to stop playback. To play music with the fold closed, do the following: 1 In standby mode, press to enter Music menu . 2 Select the music you want to play, and press . In Now playing , use the quick cover keys to control playba ck: ⢠Press to play or pause a song. When you pause a song, a list of the tracks you are currently listeni ng to is displayed. ⢠Press to rewind the track or to skip backwards. ⢠Press to fast forward the tr ack or to skip forward. ⢠To switch between Now playing and Mus ic menu , press .
Media applications 22 Music menu To select more music to play in Now playing when the fold is open, select Options > Go to Music men u . The music menu shows the music available in the device and compati ble memory card (if ins erted). All songs lists all music. To view sorted songs, selec t Albums , Artists, Genres , or Composers . To view playlists, select Track lists . To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, select Opt ions > Refresh Music library . To open the view that displa ys the currently playing song , press and hold . To switch between Now playing and Music menu when the fold is closed, press . Use the quick cover and volume keys to select mo re music to play. Select Options to modify the basic play settings. Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Track lists . The following playlists appear automa tically: Most played tracks , Recent trac ks , and Recent additions . To view details of the playlist, select Options > Track list details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > Create playlist . 2 Enter a name for the play list, and select OK . 3 Select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, press . To hide t he song list, press . 4 When you have made your selections , select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more s ongs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add so ngs . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Ad d to track list > Saved track list or New track list . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove from track list . This deletion d oes not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Option s > Reorder list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key.
Media applications 23 Music shop In the music shop (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music for downloading to your device. The variety, availabili ty, and appearance of music shop services may vary. You must have music shop settings an d valid internet connections in order to use this service. For more details, see âÂÂMusic shop settingsâÂÂ, p. 23 and âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p.106. Go to music sh op 1 In the Music menu , select Options > Go to Mus ic shop . 2 Select from the displayed opt ions to search, browse, or select ringing tones. Music shop settings The availability an d appearance of the mus ic shop settings may vary. T he settings may al so be predefined an d not editable. If the settings are not predefined, you may be asked to enter the following settings: Address âÂÂYou must define the web address of the music shop service. Default acc. pt. âÂÂSelect the access point to use when connecting to the music shop. User name âÂÂEnter your user name for the music shop. Password âÂÂEnter your password for the music shop. If User name and Password fields are left empty, you may have to enter them at login. In the music shop, you may be able to edit the setting s by selecting Options > Settings . Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatib le USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, in the Music menu , select Options > Refresh Music library The requirements of the PC for mu sic transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N76 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia Nseries PC Suite Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music:
Media applications 24 ⢠To view your device on a compatible PC as an external hard drive where you can tran sfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠T o use Nokia Musi c Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB ca ble and select PC Suite as the connection mode. To change the default USB co nnection mode, press , select Tools > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimized for transferring music files. For inform ation about transferring music with No kia Music Ma nager, see the Nokia Nseries PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player The functionality of the musi c synchronization may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and helps. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a compatible PC, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronizat ion if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a nam e th at is u sed as t he n ame of you r de vic e i n Wi ndo ws Media Player. To transfer manual s elections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected. 2 Drag the songs or albums to the list pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the files you want to synchronize and that there is enough fr ee memory on the device. Click Sta rt Sync. to s tart the synchronization. Automatic synchronizatio n To change the default file transfer op tion in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select yo ur device, and cl ick Set up Sy nc. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box.
Media applications 25 If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you co nnect your devi ce, the music libra ry in your device is automatically updated b ased on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists ha ve been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note that your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device memory and the compatible memory card of your device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information. The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Visual Radio Press , and select Ap plication s > Radio . Yo u can use the application as a traditio nal FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations, or with parallel visual information related to the radio program on the display, i f you tune to stations that of fer Visual Radio service . The Visual Radio service uses packet data (network service). You can listen to the FM radio wh ile using other applications. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may not support Visual Radio. You can normally make a ca ll or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is muted when there is an active call. If you start mus ic player when the radio is on, the radio is muted. When music playback is paused or stopped, the radio starts to play again. When the fold is closed, use the quick cover keys and the volume and mode keys to control the FM radio. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device anten na. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and s elect Applications > Radio . To start a station search, select or , or press and hold the quick cover keys or . To c hange the frequency manually, select Options > Man ual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or , o r press the quick cover keys or . To adjust the volume, press the volume keys.
Media applications 26 To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspe aker . Warning: Liste n to music at a moderate leve l. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save sta tion . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your servic e provider. To view available visual content for a tuned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual ser vice ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Re trieve to search for it in the station directory (network service). When the connection to the vi sual service is established, the display shows the current visual content. Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations when the fold is open, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, sel ect Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To switch between the list of your saved stations and listening to a saved station when the fold is closed, press . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Tip! You can add shortcuts to saved stations in the multimedia menu. See âÂÂMultimedia keyâÂÂ, p. 14. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂSelect whether a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start service âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a sa ved station that offers Visual Radio service. Access point âÂÂSelect the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio.
Media applications 27 Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are currently located in. This setting is di splayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. RealPlayer Press , and select Ap plication s > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play v ideo clips, or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4 or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all th e variations of file formats. In landscape view, use the quick cover keys to control the player. Play video clips 1 To play a saved media file, select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer recognizes an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device . RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a speci al message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and se ttingsâÂÂ, p. 70. For more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player auto matically repeat video clips after they fini sh playing Streaming âÂÂto select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings.
Media applications 28 Adobe Flash Player To view, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices, press , and select Applications > Flash Player . Scroll to a flash file, and press . Nokia Lifeblog To start Lifeblog on your device, press , and select Lifeblog . Nokia Lifeblog is a combin atio n of softwa re for mobile phone and PC that keeps a multimedia diary of the items that you collect with your device. Nokia Lifeblog automatically keeps track of y our multimedia items and organizes your photos, videos, sounds, text messages, multimedia messages, and webl og posts into a chronology that you can browse, search, sh are, publish, and back up. For more information on Nokia Lifeblog, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Camera 29 Camera Your device has two cameras, a high-resolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the upper right corner of the main display (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 1600x1200 pixels using the main camera. The ima ge resolution in this guid e may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ideo folder in Gallery . The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extensio n ( sharing quality). See âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connectivity. You can also upload them to your compatible online album. See âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. Take pictures When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is low er than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a mo ment. To continue taking pictures, press . Fold-closed mode To take a picture using the co ver display as the viewfinder, do the following: 1 To activate the main camera, press and hold . If the camera is in Video mode , press . 2 To take a picture, press . Do not move the device befo re the image is saved. Fold-open mode To take a picture using the main display as the viewfinder, do the following: 1 Open the fold.
Camera 30 2 To activate the main camera, press . If the camera is in Video mode , select Switch to Image mode from the active toolbar. 3 To take a picture, press . Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out, use the volume keys in your device. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, in the main display, press or to scroll to items on the active toolbar. In the cover display, press to activate the toolbar, an d v olume keys to scroll to items. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. To free memory before taking a picture, select Options > Go to free me mory in the main display (only available if you have backed up images or video clips using Nokia Nseries PC Suite). See âÂÂFree memoryâÂÂ, p. 40. To activate the fr ont camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . To leave the camera open in the background, and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press the capture key. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfind er (main display) displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The active toolbar, which you can scroll through before capturing the image to select diff erent items and settings (the active toolbar is not displayed during image capture). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. 3 The image resolution indicator indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 2M - Large , Print 1M - Small , or MMS 0.3M - Small . 4 The image counter displays the estimated n umber of images you can capture usin g the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during image capture). 5 The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators show where images are saved.
Camera 31 Active toolbar Active toolbar provides you with shortcut s to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. If you are using the cover di splay as a viewfinder, press to display the active toolbar. Use the vo lume keys to scroll to the item you want. To select it, press . If you are using the main displa y as a viewfinder, scroll to the item you want. To select it, press . The available options vary de pending on the capture mode. You can also define whethe r the active toolbar is always visible on the display or activated by a key press. If you want the active toolbar to be visible before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons . Only the capture mode indicator is shown on the displa y. To activate the toolbar, press . The toolbar is visible f or 5 seconds. Before taking a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following: to switch between the video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images only). See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 35. to activate the sequence mode (images only). See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 34. to select a color effect to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons change to reflect the current status of the setting. The available options vary de pending on the capture mode and view you are in. See also active toolbar options in âÂÂAfter taking a pictureâÂÂ, p. 31, âÂÂAfter recording a videoâÂÂ, p. 36, and âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 39 in Gallery . After taking a picture After you take a picture, there are several things you can do with the image using the active toolbar in t he main display (available only if Show captured image is set to On in the still image camera settings). ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete .
Camera 32 ⢠To send the image using multimedia, e-mail, Bluetooth connectivity, or upload it to your online album, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, se e âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58, and âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. This option is not available during an active call. You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (only available dur ing an active call). ⢠To tag images to the Print basket for later printing, select Add to Print Basket . ⢠To print the picture, select Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. ⢠To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press , or select Back . To use the picture as wallpaper in the active standby, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To set the image as a call image f or a contact, select Set as contact call image . Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settin gs for the still image camera: Image setup and main settings. To a djust Image se tup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. T o change the main settings , select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Print 2M - Large (1600x120 0 resolution), Print 1M - Smal l (1152x864 resolu tion) or MMS 0.3M - Small (640x4 80 resolution) If you want to print the image, select Print 2M - Large . If you want to send it throug h e-mail , select Pri nt 1M - Smal l . To send the image through MMS, select MMS 0. 3M - Small . These resolutions are only ava ilable in the main camera. In the secondary camera, the resolution is always MMS 0.3M - Small . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. Default image name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured images. Extended digital zoom (main camera only)âÂÂSelect On to allow the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digit al zoom. If you want to limit the zoom to where the selec ted image quality is maintained, select Off .
Camera 33 Capture t one âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a picture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Rotate im age - Select whether you want the image to be rotated the right way up when you open it in the gallery. Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the f lash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available for the still image camera: Automatic () , On () , R. eye redu. () , a n d Off () . To change the flash mode, in the ac tive toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Setup settingsâÂÂcolor and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add effects to your pictures or videos, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options: White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colors more accu rately. Exposure compensation (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Flash âÂÂSelect the desired flash mode. See âÂÂFlashâÂÂ, p. 33. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect fr om the list. Light sensitivity (images only)âÂÂSelect the light sensitiv ity of the camera. The darker the environment, the higher the light sens itivi ty should be. The screen display c hanges to match any settings you make, so that you see how the change affects the pictures or vid eos. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are camera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary camera, the settings in the main camera do not change. The setup settings do, however, transfer between the image and video modes. The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera.
Camera 34 If you select a new scene, the color and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. See âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. You can change the se tup settings afte r selecting a scene if needed . Scenes A scene helps you to find th e right color and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. Scenes are only availabl e in the main camera. In the active toolbar, select from the following options: Video scenes Automatic ( )(default) and Night () Image sc enes Auto () ( d e f a u l t ) , User defined () , Portrait () , Landscape () , Night () , a n d Night portrait () . When you take pictures, the default scene is Auto . To make your own scene suitabl e for a certain environment, in the ma in display, scroll t o User defined , and select Optio ns > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scen e. In the cover display, select Settings > User scene > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene . Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictures or more in a sequence (if enough memory available), in the active toolbar, select Switch to sequence mode to take six pictures in quick succession. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. To take six pictures, press the capture key. To stop taking pictures, press Cancel . To take more than six pictures, pr ess and hold the capture key. To stop taking pictures, release the capture key. You can capture up to 100 images, depending on the available memory. After you take the pictures, they are sho wn in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press to open it. If you used a time period for taking pictures, the last taken picture is shown on the display. To view other pictures, press . You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. When using the self-timer, the maximum n umber of pictures is six. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, pr ess the capture ke y.
Camera 35 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer The self-timer is available only in t he main camera . Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is ru nning. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off Self timer , in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off . Tip! In the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Record videos To record videos using the cover display as the viewfinder (fold closed), do the following: 1 If the camera is in the Image mode , press to switch to Video mode . 2 Press to start record ing. The red record ico n is shown and a tone sounds, indicatin g that recording h as started. 3 To stop recording, press or select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder in Gallery .See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 38. The maximum length of the video is 60 minutes (if enough memory available). To record videos using the ma in display as the viewfinder (fold open), do the following: 1 If the camera is in the Imag e mode , select Switch to video mode from the active toolbar. 2 To start recordin g, pre ss . The r ed record icon is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3 To stop recording, press or select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved to Images & v ideo in Gallery . See âÂÂImages and video clipsâ p. 38. The maximum length of the video is 60 minutes (if enough memory available). To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if recordin g is set to pause and there are no keypresses within a minute. Select Continue to resume rec ording. To zoom in or out of the subj ect, press the volume keys on the side of the device. To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, use the scroll key to scroll through the active
Camera 36 toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂc olor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33 and âÂÂScenesâÂÂ, p. 34. To free memory before recording a video, select Option s > Go to free memory (only available if you have ba cked up images or video clips). See âÂÂFree memoryâÂÂ, p. 40. To activate the fr ont camera, select Options > Use secondary camera . Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following: 1 The current capture mode indicator. 2 The audio mute on indicator. 3 The active toolbar, which you can scroll through befo re recording to select different items and se ttings (the toolbar is not displayed during record ing). See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 31. 4 The total available video recording time. When you are recording , the current vide o length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 5 The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators show where videos are saved. 6 The video quality indicator indicates whether the quality of the video is High , Normal , or Sharing . 7 The video clip file type. To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Sh ow icons . Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the reco rding, the available record time, zo om bar when z ooming, and the selectio n keys. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar in the main display (available only if Show captured video is set to On in video settings): ⢠T o immediat ely play th e video cli p you just reco rded, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video clip using multimedia, e-mail, Bluetooth connectivity, or upload it to your online album, press the call key, or select Send . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 67, âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58, and âÂÂOnline sharingâÂÂ, p. 42. This option is not available during an active call. You may not be able to send video c lips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an activ e call. Select Send to caller .
Camera 37 ⢠To record a new video clip, select New video . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂcolor and lightingâÂÂ, p. 33. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High (best quality for long term usage and playback on a compatible TV or PC and handset), Normal (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using multimedia message). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select High , which has QVGA resolution (320x240) and the .mp4 file format. To send the video clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). The size of the video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in duration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Audio recording âÂÂSelect Off if you do not want to record sound. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you wan t the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the vid eo clip. Default video name âÂÂDefine the default name for the captured video clips. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: device memory or memory card (if inserted). Restore camera settings âÂÂSelect Yes to return the d efault values to the camera settings .
Gallery 38 Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, press , and select Gallery . Tip! If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture in Gallery , press . To enter the Images & video folder main view, press again. View and browse files Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , Presentati ons , or All files , and press to open it.. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 40. Files stored on your compatibl e memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . To open a file, press . Vide o clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in RealPlayer , and music and sound clips in Music player . See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 27, and âÂÂMusic playerâÂÂ, p. 21. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Move and copy > Copy to memory card or Move to memory card , or Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem. . To download sound clips into Gallery using the browser, in the Sound clips folder s, select Downld. sounds . Images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & video folder in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail at tachment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a rec eived image or video clip in Gallery or in a media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a co mpatible memory card (if inserted). Select Gallery > Images & video . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one,
Gallery 39 press or . To browse f iles in groups, press or . To switch between landscape and portrait modes, select Options > Rotate display . The content in the Images & v ideo folder is shown in the selected mode. When the imag e is opened, to zoom in an image, press the zoom keys on the side of your devi ce. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To rota te the se lected ima g e left or right, select Options > Rotate > Left or Right . To print your images on a co mpatible printer or to store them on a compatible memor y card (if in serted) for printing, select Options > Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. You can also tag images for later printing to the Print Basket in Gallery . See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 40. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Option s > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂEdit video c lipsâÂÂ, p. 43. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 42. To create custom video clips, select a video cli p or several clips in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 43. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 40. To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper. To delete an image or video clip, from the active toolbar, select Delete . See âÂÂActive toolbarâÂÂ, p. 39. To switch from Gallery to the camera, press . Active toolbar In the Images & video folder, you can use active toolbar as a shortcut to select differen t tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to di fferent items, and select them by pressi ng . The avai lable options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a vi deo clip. Yo u can al so defin e whether the active toolbar is always visible on the display or activated by a keypress. If you want the active toolbar to be visible on the display, select Option s > Show icons . If you want the active toolbar to be visible only when you need it, select Option s > Hide icons . To activate the active toolbar, press . Select from the following: to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip
Gallery 40 / to add or remov e an image from the Pr int Basket. See âÂÂPrint BasketâÂÂ, p. 40. to view the images in the Print Basket to start a slide show of your images to delete the selec ted image or video clip to print the viewed image to reduce the resolution of the selected image to fr ee memory for new images. See âÂÂFree me mo ryâÂÂ, p. 40. The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Print Basket You can tag images to the Print Basket, and print them later with a compatible printer or in a compatible printing kiosk, if available. See âÂÂIma ge printâÂÂ, p. 41. The tagged images are indicated with in the Images & video folder and albums. To tag an image for la ter printing, sele ct an image, and Add to Print Basket from the active toolbar. To view the images in the Print Basket, select View Print Basket from the active toolbar, or select from the Images & vide o folder (available only when you have added pictures to the Print Basket). To remove an image from the Print Basket, select an image in the Images & video folder or in an album, and Remove from print from the active toolbar. Albums With albums you can conven ie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, select Images & video > Options > Albums > View albums . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or vid eo clip. The added pictures and video clips are not deleted from the Images & video folder. To remove a file from an album, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gal lery . To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New albu m . Free memory To reduce the resolution and file size of images saved in Gallery and free memory for new pictures, select Options > Shrink . To back up the images first, copy them
Gallery 41 to a compatible PC or other location. Selecting Shrink reduces the resolution of a n image to 640x480. To increase free memory space after you have copied items to other locations or devices, select Options > Free memory . You can browse a list of files you have copied. To remove a copied file from Gallery , select Options > Delete . Image print To print images with Image print , select the image you want to print, and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card (if av ailable). You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. To print to a printer compatib le with PictBridge, connect the data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data ca ble mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection . See âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. Th e printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible with PictBridge using a compatible USB data cable, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Op tions > Settings > Default printer . Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layo uts. To change the layout, press or to browse through the available layout s for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printe r .
Gallery 42 To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online , you can order prints of images online directly to your home, or to a store where you can pick them up. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online , you must have at least one printing service configuration file in stalled. The files can be obtained from printing serv ice providers that support Print online . For more information on the application, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Online sharing With Online share , you can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depe nding on the servic e provid er. To use Online share , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service provider. Contact your servic e provider for details on subscribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see the product support pages at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. For more information on the application, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Options > Apply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit optio ns indicated by smal l icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution ; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, se lect Options > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, s elect Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual ,
Gallery 43 a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first select ed area, select Back . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you selected a predefined as pect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cr opped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press . To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . Reduce redness To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Optio ns > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Useful shortcuts Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠T o view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in o r out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, press , , , or . Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. You can use Movie dir ector to create custom video clips. Select the video clips and images you want to create a muvee with and select Options > Edit > Create mu vee . See âÂÂMovie directorâÂÂ, p. 44. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, send the clip using B luetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 59. You can als o transfer your vide os to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, a compatible USB cable, or by using a compatible memory card reader enhancement. Slide show In the active toolbar, selec t Slide show ( ) to view a slide show of images in full screen. The slide show starts from the selected file . Select from the following:
Gallery 44 Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resu me the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, press (previous) or (next) (available only when Zoom and pan is off). To adjust the tempo of t he slide show, before starting the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between slides . To make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let the gallery ra ndomly zoom in and out in the images, select Z oom and pan . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Music or Track . To decrease or increase the volume, use the volume keys in your device. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. SV G images maintain their appearance when prin ted or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, select Presentations , scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, select Optio ns > Pause . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press . To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise, press or . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press or . To switch between full screen and normal screen, press . Movie director To create muvees, press , and select Gallery , images and videos, and Options > Edit > Create muvee . A muvee is a short, edited video clip that can contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie dire ctor uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. In a custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an openi ng and closing message. You can send muvees in a multimedia message. A muvee can be save d in Gallery in .3gp file format. Create a quick muvee 1 In Gallery , select images and videos for the muvee, and Options > Edit > Create muv ee . The style selection view opens. 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. 3 Select Options > Create muvee .
Gallery 45 Create a custom muvee 1 In Gallery , select images and videos for the muvee, an d Options > Edit > Create mu vee . The style selection view opens. 2 Scroll to the desired style, and select Options > Customise . 3 Reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee in Videos & images or Music . In Videos & images , you can define the order in which the files are played in the muvee. To select the file you want to move, press . Then scroll to the file below which you want to place the marked file, and press . To add or remove images an d videos from the muvee, select Options > Add/Remove . To add albums and their cont ent to the muvee, in the image or video cl ip list view, select Options > Albums . To cut the video clips, In Videos & images , select Options > Select contents . See âÂÂSelect contentâÂÂ, p. 45. In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. In Lengt h , you can define the length of the muvee. Select from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimize the length of the muvee for sending in a multimedia mess age Auto-select âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip User defined âÂÂto define the length of the muvee 4 Select Options > Create muvee . The preview view opens. 5 To preview the custom muvee be fore saving it, select Options > Play . 6 To save the muvee, select Opti ons > Save . To create a new custom muve e by using the same style settings, se lect Opti ons > Recreate . Select content To edit the selected video clips, in the Videos & images folder, select Options > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. In the slide, green indicates included, red indicates excluded, and grey indicates neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, a nd select Options > Include . To exclude a part, select Option s > Exclude . To exclude a shot, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a certain part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Mark as neutral . To randomly includ e or exclude parts of the clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral .
Gallery 46 Settings In the style selection view, sele ct Options > Customise > Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees. Select Automatic to use the optimal resolution based on the number and length of the video clips you have selected. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Personalize your device 47 Personalize your device To personalize your device, select from the following: ⢠To use t he standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. ⢠To change the standby mode background image o r what is shown in the screen saver, see âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 48. ⢠To change t he look of the cover display, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 49. ⢠To customize the ringing tone s, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 47 and âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 90. ⢠To change the shortcuts as signed for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 99. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digi tal . ⢠To ch ange the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Personalisation > Display > Welcome note / logo . ⢠T o change the main menu view, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid or List . ⢠To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select Options > Icon animation > On . ⢠To r earrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that you use more of ten into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, envir onments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Activate . You can also change the profile by pressing in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! To switch between th e general and silent profiles, press and hold . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with .
Personalize your device 48 In the tones list, the Download sounds link (network service) opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken when your device rings, select Options > Personalise , and set Say caller's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, s elect Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profil e, the connecti on to the wireless network is turned off, as in dicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If yo u try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. When the Offline pr ofile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Ca lls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To ma ke calls, yo u must firs t activate t he phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. You can also use Blu etooth connectivity while in the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 58. To leave the Offline profile, press the power key, and select another profile. The device re-enables wireless transmissions (provid ing there is sufficient signa l strength). Change the look of your device To change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . To change the theme that is us ed for all the applications in your device, select Themes > General . To change the theme of a certain application, in the main view, select an application. To preview a theme befor e activating it, select Options > Preview . To activate the theme, select Options > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card
Personalize your device 49 without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. To change the layout of the main menu, select Themes > Menu view . To open a browser connection and download mo re themes, in General or Menu view , select Download themes (network service). Imp ortant: Use only services that y ou trust and that offer adequate security and protecti on against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper and power saver of the current theme, select Themes > Wallpaper to change the background image on the display for the active standby mode. See also âÂÂDisplayâÂÂ, p. 98 for power saver time-out setting. Cover display To change the look of the cover display, press and select Tools > Themes > Cover personalis. , and from the following: Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. Screen saver âÂÂSelect an image or animation to use as a screen saver on the cover display and how long it is displayed. When you select an image to use as wallpaper or a screen saver, a cropping frame the size of the cover disp lay is shown on top of the image. You can zoom and rotate the area of the image. Scroll to move the frame around the display. To use the area inside the frame, select Options > Set as wallpaper or Set as screen saver . You cannot use a copyright-protected image as wallpaper or screen saver. Closing animation âÂÂSelect a short animation to play when you close the cover. Closing tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you close the cover. Opening tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you open the cover and the device is in the standby mode. Active standby mode The active standby display sh ows application shortcut s, and events from applications such a s calendar and playe r. To switch the active standb y on or off, press , and select To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby .
Personalize your device 50 Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applicationsâ shortcuts, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby apps. . Some shortcuts may be fixed , and you cannot change them.
Web browser 51 Web browser Press , and select Web ( network service). Shortcut: To start the web browser, press and hold in the standby mode. With the web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mob ile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or the wireless markup lang uage (WML ). With Web , you can zoom in and out on a page, use Mini Map and page overview to navigate on pages, read web feeds and blogs, bookmark web pages, and download content. Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. To use the web browser, you need an access point to connect to internet. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or se rver is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested r esource is stored) is secure. The service provider secure s the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security c ertifica t es may be re quired for some serv ices, such as banking services. You are notifie d if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertifi cate managementâÂÂ, p. 101 for mor e information on the certificates and certifi cate details. Bookmarks view The bookmarks view allows you to select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Auto. Bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field ( ).
Web browser 52 indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses a s bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also sa ve addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send save d bookmarks. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third-party sites through your device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with No kia, and Nokia does not end orse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take prec au tions for sec urity or conten t. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press , or select Options > Bookmarks . To edit the details of a bookma rk, such as the tit le, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also enter other browser folders. The web browser allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. The web browser also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. Bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web Feeds , you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organization web pages, personal weblogs, online communities that offer latest headlines, an d article summa ries. Web feeds use RSS and ATOM technologies. Browse the web offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. With Web , you can view web pages as they are originally designed. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter th e address in the field ( ). Then press . Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of memory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page > Load images and sounds > No . Tip! To ret urn to the standby mode with the browse r open in the background, press twice or . To return to the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Important: Use only serv ices that you trust and that
Web browser 53 To open links and make selections, press . To open a link in a new window, select Options > Window > Link in new window . To enter a new web page addres s you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip! To visit a web page saved as bookmark in the bookmarks view, while brow sing, press and select a bookmark. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save the web address of th e current page as boo kmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . To use Visual history to view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (av ailable if History list is set on in the browser settings) or Options > Navigation options > History . To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options > Tools > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or compatible memory card (if inserted), and browse them when offline. You can also grou p the pages into folders. To access the pages later, in the bookmarks view, select Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currentl y open pa ge, sel ect Opt ions > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Window > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . Shortcuts while browsing ⢠Press to open your bookmarks. ⢠Press to search for keyw ords in the current page. ⢠Press to return to the previous page. ⢠Press to list all open windows. ⢠Press to close the current window if two or more windows are open. ⢠Press to show the page overview of the current page. Press ag ain to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. ⢠Press to enter a new web address. ⢠Press to go to the start page. ⢠Press or to zo om the page in or out. To switch between portrait and landscape views, select Options > Rotate screen . Text Search To search for keywords within the current web page, select Options > Find > Text , and enter a keyword. To go to the
Web browser 54 previous match, press . To go to the next match, press . Tip! To search for keywords within the page, press . Browser toolbar With the toolbar, you can select most fr equently used features in the browser. To open the toolbar, press on an empty spot on a web page. To move within the toolbar, press or , To select a feature, press . In the toolbar, select from the following: Frequently used links to view a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. Page overview to view the overview of the curr ent web page. Find to search for keywords within the current page. Reload to refresh the page. Subscribe (if available) to view a list of available web feeds on the current web pa ge, and subscribe to a web feed. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are hand le d by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo or an .mp3 f ile can be saved in Gallery . Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified TM testing. 1 To download the item, select the link. 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item (for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ). 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . When you start a download, a list of ongoing and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To also view the list, select Optio ns > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Mini Map Mini Map helps you to navigate on web pages that contain large amount of informat ion. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview
Web browser 55 of the web page you browse. To scroll in Mini Map , press , , , or . When you find the desired location, stop scrolling, and Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini Map > On . Page overview When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use page overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press . To find the desired spot on the page, press , , , or . Press again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are widely used by the weblog community and ne ws organizations to share the latest entry headlines or full text, for example, recent news in the form of news fe eds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and AT OM technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The web browser automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web fee d, select Options > Subscribe , or click on the li nk. To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds . To update a web feed, select it, and Options > Refr esh . To define how the web feeds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 56. End connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; or to end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Pressing does not end the connection but takes the browser to the background. To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookies . To clear the dat a you entered for dif ferent form s on the web pages you visited, select Options > Clear privacy data > Form passwo rd data . To clear the information stor e d about the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Options > Clear privacy data > History .
Web browser 56 Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the de vice. A cache is a memory loca tion that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation o r services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Settings Select Options > Settings and from the followi ng: General settings Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 105. Some or a ll access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Mini Map âÂÂSet Mi ni Map on or off. See âÂÂMini MapâÂÂ, p. 54. History list âÂÂWhile browsing, to use the selection key Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show security notifications. Java/ECMA script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of script s. Page settings Load images and sounds âÂÂSelect whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select No , to load images or objects l ater during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂSelect between Full screen and the normal view with the Options list. Default encodin g âÂÂIf text charac ters are not s hown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page. Font size âÂÂDefine the font size that is used fo r web pages. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂIf you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . Privacy settings Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue savin g the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. Bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder .
Web browser 57 Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used next time the page is entered, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the re ceiving and s ending of cookies. Serial no. sending âÂÂTo send the serial number of your device as your user identifi cation when requested by web services, select On (if avail able). Web feeds settings Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically or not, and how often you want to update them. Setting the application to retrieve web feeds automa tically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. Acc. point fo r auto-update (only av ailable when Automatic updates is on)âÂÂSelect the desired access point for updating.
Connections 58 Connections Connection manager Data connections Press , and select Tools > Con n. mgr. > Act ive data connections . In the active connections view, you can see the open data connections: data calls ( ), and packet data connections ( or ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depend ing on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with wireless Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobi le phones, comp uters, and enhancem ents such a s headsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, musi c and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to trans fer files); connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image p rint . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. Since devices with Bluet ooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves , your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of each other, but the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as wall s or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant w ith Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following prof iles: Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Generic A ccess Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Prof ile, Object Push Profile, Service Discovery Application Pr ofi le, Serial Port Profile. To ensure interoperability betw een other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device.
Connections 59 There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Blue tooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When yo u open the application for the firs t time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Blueto oth âÂÂTo connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. To switch off Bl uetooth connectivity, select Off . My phone's vi sibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time after which the vis ibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period . T o hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name shown to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On . For more information, see âÂÂRemote SIM modeâÂÂ, p. 61. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visi bility > Hidden . I n this way, you can better cont rol who can find your device with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headse t, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. For Bluetooth connectivity indicators, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 17.
Connections 60 Tip! To send text using Bluetoot h connectivity, open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology within range start to appear on the display. Device icons: computer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrup t the search, sele ct Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible de vices and view your paired devices, in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, cr eate your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1 To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology within range start to appear on the display. 2 Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enh ancement, and select Opt ions > Connect . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorized or unauthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time.
Connections 61 To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to c ancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages received through Bluetooth co nnectivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 69. Remote SIM mode To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 59. Before the mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 60. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indica tor ar ea, and you cannot use SIM card services or feat ures requiring ce llular network coverage. When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compatible connected enhancement, such as a car kit, to make or receiv e calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, excep t to the emergency numbers programmed into your device, while in this mode. To make calls from your devi ce, you must first l eave the r emote SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exi t remote SIM mode . USB Press , and s elect Tools > USB . To have the device ask the purpose of the USB cable connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following: Media player âÂÂto synchronize music with Windows Media Player. See âÂÂMusic transfer with Windows Media PlayerâÂÂ, p. 24.
Connections 62 PC Suite âÂÂto use to use the data cable connection for the Nokia Nseries PC Suite Data transfer â to transfer data be tween your device and a compatible PC Image pr int âÂÂto print images on a comp atible printer. See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 41. PC connections You can use your device with a var iety of compatible PC connectivity and data communi cations applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, tr ansfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from th e PC to synchronize with your device. Synchronization Sync enables you to synchronize your notes, calendar , text messages, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronizat ion settings in a special message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. A synchronizat ion profile contains the necessary setting s to synchroni ze data in your device with a remote database on a server or compatible device. 1 Press , and select Tools > Sync . 2 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . To cancel synchronization bef ore it finishes, select Cancel . Device manager To connect t o a server and receive configuration settings for your device, to create new server profiles, or to view and manage existing server pr ofiles, press , and select Tools > Device mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your serv ice providers and company information management department. These configuration settings may i nclude connect ion and other settings used by different applications in your device. Scroll to a server profile, and select Options and from the following: Start configuration âÂÂto connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device New server profile âÂÂto create a server profile To delete a server profile, scroll to it, and press .
Download! 63 Download! Download! (network service) is a mobile content shop available on your device. With Download! you can discover, prev iew, buy, download, and upgrade content, services, and applications that work with your Nokia N76. Games, ringing tones, wallpapers, applications, and much more are right at hand. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by different service providers. The available content depends on your service provider. Press , and select Download! . Download! uses your network services to access the most up-to-date content. For info rmation on addition al items available through Download! , contact your service provider or the supplier or manufacturer of the item. Download! receives ongoing updates, bringing you the latest co ntent your se rvice prov ider of fers for your device. To update the content in Download! manually, select Options > Refresh list . To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, for example, to view only the items you use frequently, select Options > Hide . To make all the hidden items visible again, select Options > Show all . To buy the selected item in the main view or in a folder or catalog, select Options > Buy . A submenu opens, where you can sel ect the ve rsion of the item and view price information. The available options depend on the service provid er. To download an item that is free of charge, select Options > Get . Settings for Download! The application updates your device with the most recent content available from your service provider and other available channels. To change the settings, select Options > Settings and from the foll owing: Access point âÂÂTo select which access point is used t o connect to the service providerâÂÂs server and whether to have the device to ask for the access point every time you use. Automatic open âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the content or application to be opened automatically after downloading. Preview confirmation âÂÂSelect No if you want to automatically download a preview of the content or
Download! 64 application. Select Yes if you want to be asked separately each time before downloading a preview. Buy confirmation âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to be asked for confirmation before buying co ntent or an application. If you select No the buying process starts immediately after you select the option Buy . After you complete the settings, select Back .
Time management 65 Time management Clock Press , and select Ap plication s > Clock . To view your active and inactive alarms, press . To set a new alar m, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is a ctive, is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . To stop the alar m for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the dev ice asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an ala rm, select Applications > Clock > Options > Remove alarm . To change clock sett ings, selec t Applications > Cl ock > Options > Settings > Ti me or Date , Clock type , or Clo ck alarm tone . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone informa tio n to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . World clock To open the world clock view, select Clock , and press twice. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add ci ties to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a ma ximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, sc roll to a city, and select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the ti me in your device is changed according to th e city selec ted. Check that the ti me is correct and match es your time zone. Calendar Press and se lect Calendar . To add a new calendar entry, scroll to the desired date, select Options > New entry and one of the following: 1 Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Meeting request âÂÂto create and send a new meeting request. You need to have a mailbox set up for sending requests. See âÂÂMailboxâÂÂ, p. 71. Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day
Time management 66 Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fiel ds. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm time and Alarm date . To add a description for an entry, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to Subject . In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. When the calendar alarms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . You can synchronize your ca lendar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired sy nchronisation option. Calendar views Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. To go to a cert ain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press . To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To send a calendar note to a compatible device, selec t Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. To modify the calendar, select Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title . Manage your calendar entries To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All entries . To m a r k a t a s k a s c o m pl e t e d, s c r ol l t o it i n t he t o - do v i e w , and select Opt ions > Mark as done .
Messaging 67 Messaging Press , and select Me ssaging (n etwork service). Only device s that have compatible f eatures can re ceive and display multimedia mess ages. Th e appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. To create a new message, select New me ssage . Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, exc ept e-mail and ce ll broadcast messages, are stored her e. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates fo lder. You ca n also create and save your own template s. Mailbox âÂÂConnect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last me ssages that hav e been sent, excluding messages sent usin g Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 76. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter a nd send se rvice re quests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands fo r network services, to your service pro vider, select Option s > Service command in the main view of Messaging . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . Cell broadcast messages cann ot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception.
Messaging 68 Text modes ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. To switch between the lette r and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To insert a number in the le tter mode, press and hold the desired number key. is displayed when you write text using traditional text input and when using predictive text input. With predictive text, you ca n enter any letter with a single keypress. Predictive text in put is based on a built-in dictionary to which you can add new words. To activate predictive text input, press , and select Predictive text on . Tip! To turn predictive text input on or off, quickly press twice. Write and send messages Before you can create a mu ltimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂE-mail settingsâÂÂ, p . 71 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it ca n be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and from the following: Text message âÂÂto send a text message Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) Audio message âÂÂto send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press . You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of a multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields .
Messaging 69 4 In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select Options > Insert or Insert object > Templa te . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip. To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Op tions > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Note: Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Yo ur devi ce may not indicate whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details abou t messaging ser vices, co ntact your service provider. Your device supports the sendin g of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and chara cters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exc eed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia mess age. Tip! You can combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia mes sage, and select Options > Create presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 73. InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia me ssage, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectiv ity.
Messaging 70 When you receive a message, and 1 new me ssage are displayed in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show . I f the fold is closed and the message cannot appear on the cover, Open fold to view message is displayed. Open the cov er to view the message. When the fold is open, scroll to Inbox , and press to open it. To reply to a received message, selec t Options > Reply . When the fold is closed and you h ave more than one unread message, select Show to open Inbox . Use the volume and quick cover keys to navigate in the Inbox folder and when viewing messages. Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To start a packet data connection to re trieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Objects . If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receive many kin ds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar entries, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider or company information manage ment department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Op tions and the corresponding option. Web service messages Web service messages ar e noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may c ontain a text message or a link. For availability and subscriptio n, contact your service provider.
Messaging 71 Mailbox E-mail settings Tip! Use Settings Wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press , and select Tools > Sett. wizard . To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. If you select Mailbox in the Messagin g main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prom pted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox gu ide, sele ct Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 74. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). When you create a new mailbox , the name you gi ve to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main vie w. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, sele ct Yes . When you view message s online, y ou are c ontinuo usly conne cted to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the messaging main view or Opti ons > Create message > E- mail in your mailbox. See âÂÂWrite and send messagesâÂÂ, p. 68. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when openin g messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following: New âÂÂto retrieve all new messages Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 If you want to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect .
Messaging 72 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and sele ct the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; s elect Options > Retri eve . Retrieve e-mail messages auto matically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E- mail settings > Automatic retrieval . For more information, se e âÂÂAutomat ic retrievalâÂÂ, p. 76. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e- mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-ma il headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the mes sage content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete message from: , select Phone and server . To cancel deleting a n e-mai l from the device and server, scroll to a n e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view S IM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens.
Messaging 73 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Follow the instruct ions given by your service provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select M essaging > Optio ns > Settin gs > Text message and from the following: Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Message centre in use âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when avail able, select Reduced support . Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network sends delivery report s on your mess ages (netwo rk service). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂContact your service provider to learn if your message center is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Preferred connect ion âÂÂSelect the connection to be used. Reply via same centre âÂÂSelect whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > Multim edia mes sage and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from se nding messages th at may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free . Access point in use âÂÂSelect which access point is used a s the preferred connection.
Messaging 74 Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automa tically in your home cellular network , select Auto in ho me netw. . Outside your home cellular n etwork, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message center. Outside your h ome cellular network, se nding and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Mult imedia r etriev al > Always automatic , your device automatically makes an ac tive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Deny report sending âÂÂSelect whether you want to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settin gs > E-mail . To select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the following settings: Connection se ttings , User settings, Re trieval settings , and Automatic retrieval . To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, scroll to it, and press . To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox . Connection sett ings To edit the settings for the e -mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server âÂÂEnter th e IP addr ess or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an internet access p oint (IAP). See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106.
Messaging 75 Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol th at your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The opt ions are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. Security (ports) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the fol lowing: My e-mail addres s âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server âÂÂEnter th e IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service pro vider for mo re info rmation. The settings for User n ame , Password, Access point in use , Security (ports) , a nd Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e -mail . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name . Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supp orts this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the devi ce to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signatur e âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail alerts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Partially (kB) (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the f older path for folde rs to be subscribed.
Messaging 76 Folder su bscriptio ns (for IMAP4 only)â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval E-mail notifi cations âÂÂTo auto matically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw. . E-mail re trieval âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. . Define when and how often the messages are r etrieved. E-mail notifi cations and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmission charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Select whether yo u want to receive service messag es. If you wa nt to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Autom atically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider . Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast and from the following: Reception âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new topic numb ers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settin gs > Other and from the following: Save sent me ssages âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Se nt folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted.
Messaging 77 Memory in use âÂÂIf a compatible memory card is ins erted in the device, select the memory wher e you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . IMâÂÂinstant messaging Press , and select Ap plication s > IM . Instant messaging (network s ervice) allows you to converse with other people using instant mess ages and join discussion forums (IM gr oups) with specific topics. Various service providers main tain compatible IM servers that you can log in to after yo u register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their sup port of features. Before you can use in stant messaging, you must define the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. For more information on instant messaging, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Make calls 78 Make calls Voice calls 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twic e for the character (replaces the international a ccess code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. Closing the fold does not end an active voice call. To adjust the volume during a call, use the volume keys on the side of your device. If you have set the vo lume to Mute , select Unmute first. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. M atching contacts are listed. To call, press . You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before you can make a call this way. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 89. To call a recently dialed numb er in the standby mode, press . Scroll to the number, and press . To send an image or a video cli p in a multimedia message to the other participant of the call, select Options > Send MMS (in UMTS networ ks only). You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device (network service). To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTM F string or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. You can add DTMF ton es to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming call, select Options > Hold . To switch between the active and the held c all, select Optio ns > Swap . To connect the active and held calls and drop yourself from the line, sele ct Op tions > Tran sfer . Tip! When you have only one active voice c all, to put the call on hold, press . To activate the call, press again. During an active call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Activate loudspeaker . If you
Make calls 79 have attached a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate hand sfree . To switch back to the handset, select Op tions > Activate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Replace . If you have several calls acti ve, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video ma ilbox (network services, video mailbox available only in th e UMTS network), press and hold in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 104, and âÂÂVideo callsâÂÂ, p. 80. To change the phone number of your voice or video mai lbox, press , and select To ols > all mail bo x , a mailbox, and Optio ns > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your wi reless service provider), and select OK . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participa nt in the conference ca ll, sele ct Optio ns > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still continue th e conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the partic ipant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conf eren ce call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialin g, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > C all > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Speed dial . C
Make calls 80 Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assig n . is reserved for the voice or video mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card, scroll to the number with a voice tag, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely sole ly upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. If a compatible headset with the headset key is a ttached, pres s and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. Af ter a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel voice dialing. If several numbers are saved un der the name, the device selects the default number if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business), Telephone, Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call (network s ervice), you can see a real-time, two-way video be tween you and the recipient
Make calls 81 of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video c all, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to vide o call services, contact your wireless service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a comp atible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cann ot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video send ing from your device. To send a still image instead, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 103. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 To start a video c all, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a cont act. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera inside the fold is us ed by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful ( for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a no rmal call or send a text o r multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video s ending ( ), in which case you only hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Option s > Enable or Disabl e > Sending video , Sending audio or Sending aud. & video . To zoom in or out your own image, press or . To switch the places of th e sent video images on the display, select Options > Change image order . To route the audio to a compat ible headset with Bluetooth connectivit y attached t o your device, select Options > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeaker of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume keys on the side of the device. To use the main camera for sending video, select Options > Use main came ra . To switch back to the secondary camera , select Options > Use secondary camera .
Make calls 82 To end the video call, press . Video sharing Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is acti ve when you activate Video sharing . If you do not want to use the loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also use a compatible headset. Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on the UMTS network availability. Contact your servi ce provider for more information on the serv ice and network availability, and fees associ ated with using this service. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 82. ⢠E nsure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 82. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start Video shari ng if you are not within UMTS network coverage. ⢠E nsure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cove rage, or does not hav e Video sharing installed or person-to- person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) c onnec tion. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Ask your service provider fo r the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air or give you a list of the needed parameters . If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on the personâÂÂs contact card. Open Contacts from your device main menu, and open the contact card (or start a new card for that pe rson). Se lect Options > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the format
Make calls 83 username@domainname (you can use a n IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know a SIP address for the contact, you can also use the phone number of the r ecipient including the country code, for example 358, to share video (if supported by the wireless service provider). UMTS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service provider to es tablish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 105. Share live video or video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Option s > Share video > Live video . To share a video clip, select Options > Share video > Recorded clip . A list of video clips saved on the device memory or compatible memory card opens. Select a clip you want to share. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 2 If you share live video, your device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If you share a video clip, select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be converted for sharing . Continue ? appears. Select OK . If the contact informa tion of the recipient is saved in Contacts , and the contact has se veral SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code, select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is no t available, enter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue t o r e s u m e s h a r i n g . T o f a s t f o r w a r d o r r e w i n d the video clip, press or . To play the clip again, press Play . 5 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. To save the live video you shared, select Save to accept the Save shared video clip? query. The shared video is saved in the Images & video folder in Gallery . If you access other applications while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paus ed. To return to the video sharing view and continue sharing, in the active standby
Make calls 84 mode, select Options > Continue . See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. Accept an invitation When someone sends yo u a share invi tation, an invi tation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Accept âÂÂto activate the sharing session. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the end key to d ecline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. When you are receiving a video clip, to mute the sound of the clip, select Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the active voice call ends. Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press . If Answer if fold opened is set to Yes in settings, open the fold. To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . If you do not want to answer a call, press . If you have activated the Call divert > If busy func tion to divert calls, declinin g an incomi ng call al so divert s the cal l. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 104. When you sele ct Silence to mute the ringing tone of the incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, p. 103. Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Press t o answer the video call. Allow video image to be s en t to ca ll er ? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear t h e sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen
Make calls 85 with a still image captured by the camera in your device, see âÂÂCallâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 103. To end the video call, press . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another ca ll in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > C all waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two call s, select Swap . To connect an incoming call or a call on ho ld with an active ca ll and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Log To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed voice calls, press , and select Applications > Log > Recent calls . The device register s missed and received calls only if the netw ork supports these functions, the device is switched on, an d within the network service area. To clear all recent cal l lists, select Options > Cle ar recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to th e event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Applications > Log > Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, roundin g off for billing, and so forth . To clear call duration timers, select Optio ns > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select Applications > Log > Packet data . For exam ple, you may be charged for your packet data connections by t he amount of data sent and received.
Make calls 86 Monitor all communication events Icons in Log are as follows: Incom ing Outgoing Missed communica tion events To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select Applications > Log , and press to open the general log. Su be v en ts , s u ch a s a te x t m e ss ag e s e nt in m or e t h an o ne part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add an unknown phon e number from Log to your contacts, select Options > Save to Contacts . To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, an d messaging delivery reports permanentl y, select Optio ns > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To remove a single event from the log, press . To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Lo g duration . If you selec t No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messag ing delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip! In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy number . To view from th e packet data counter how much data is transferred and how long a certa in packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoi ng event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details . Push to talk Press , and select Tools > PTT . Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service implemen ted over a GSM/GPRS network. Push to talk provides di rect voice communication connected with the push of a key. Use push t o talk to have a conversation with one person or with a group of people. Before you can use push to talk, you must define the push-to-talk access point an d push-to-talk settings. You may receive the setting s in a sp ecial text message from the service provider that offers t he push-to-talk service. You can also use the Sett. wizard application for configuration, if supported by your service provider. In push-to-talk communication , one perso n talks while the others listen through the built-in loudspeaker. Spe akers take turns responding to ea ch other. Because o nly one group member can talk at any time, the maximum duration
Make calls 87 of a speech turn is limited. The maximum duration is usually set to 30 seconds. For details of the spe ech turn duration for your network, cont act your servic e provider. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Phone calls always take pr iority over push-to-talk activities. For more inform ation on push to talk, see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia website.
Contacts (phonebook) 88 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Con tacts . In Con tacts you can save and update contact informatio n, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing to ne or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You ca n also create cont act groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. You ca n add received cont act information (business c ards) to contacts. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Co ntact info rmat ion can only be sent to or received from com patible devices. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Cont acts info . Save and edit names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit c ontact ca rds in Contacts , scroll to the conta ct card you want to edit, and select Optio ns > Edit . You can also search for the des ired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip! To add and edit contact cards, you can als o use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nok ia Nseries PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag assi gned to the contact, select a contact card and Options > Play voice tag . See âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 80. To send contact information, select the ca rd you want to send and Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bl uetooth . See âÂÂMessagi ngâÂÂ, p. 67 and âÂÂSend data using Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 59. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group: (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 90. To check to which groups a contact belong s, select the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a contact card in Cont acts , select a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete.
Contacts (phonebook) 89 Default numbers and addresses You can assign defa ult numbers or addresses to a con tact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialing. 1 In the address book, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you wa nt to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory , the names you want to copy, and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts , selec t the names you want to copy an d Options > Copy to SIM directory , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia Nseries PC Sui te. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and s elect Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM direc tory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls from y our device to selected phone numbers, select Options > Activate fixed dialling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and d eactivate fixed dialing or edit your fixed dialing contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When yo u use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when send ing text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 90 When fixed dialing is activated, c alls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following: 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the se lected group. You can also use a video clip as a ri nging tone. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognizes it). To remove t he ringin g tone, s elect Default tone from the list of ring ing tones. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4 Select the group, and Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want t o add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, select th e group you want to modify . 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group.
Office 91 Office Calculator Press , and select Of fice > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Adobe Reader With Adobe Reader, you can read .pdf docu ments on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for .pdf document content on handsets and ot her mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions. To open documents, press , and select Of fice > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . Use File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on a compatible memory card (if inserted). More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com. To share questions, suggestions, and information about the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://a dobe.com/support/forums/ main.html. Converter To convert measures fr om one unit to another, press , and select Office > Converter . Converter has limited accura cy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Unit field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value yo u want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value.
Office 92 Set base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates be cause all previously set exchange rates are cleared. Notes To write notes in .txt format, press , and select Office > Notes . Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Office > Recorder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Wireless Keyboard To set up a compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth human interface de vices (HID) profil e for use with your device, use the Wireless keybd. application. The keyboard enables you to enter text in comfort, using the full QWERTY layout, for text messages, e-mail, and calendar entries. 1 Activate Bluetooth connectivity on your device. 2 Switch on the keyboard. 3 Press , and select Office > Wireless keybd. . 4 Select Options > Find keyboard to s tart searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. 5 Select the keyboard from th e list, and press to start the connection. 6 To pair the keyboard with yo ur device, enter a pa sscode of your choice (1 to 9 dig its) on the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. To enter the digits of the passcode, you may need to press the Fn key first. 7 If you are asked for a keyboard layout, select it fro m a list on your device. 8 When the name of the keyboard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the green indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide.
Tools 93 Tools Application manager Press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications and software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis or .sisx exten sion. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N76. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N76-1. Installa tion files may be t ransf erred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). Install applications and software indicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fully installed, and that the application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trus ted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing . Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, a nd the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . To display the security cert ificate details of the application, in Cer tificates , select View details . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 101. ⢠If you instal l a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the orig inal application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy.
Tools 94 ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the ap plication, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 To locate an ins tallation file, press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a compat ible memo ry card (if inserted) in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installat ion file. 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate it in the menu, and press . If the application does not have a default f older defined, it is installed in the Applic ations fo lder. To see which software packag es are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the de vi ce to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Nseries PC Su ite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, th en use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. See âÂÂFile managerâÂÂ, p. 19. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that s oftware. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package
Tools 95 may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installat ion âÂÂSelect whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications may re quire a message to be sent or a network connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Open to change settings related to that spec ific application. Digital rights management Content owners may use differ ent types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including cop yrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0 and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may as k that such DRM so ftware's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in yo ur device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected cont ent comes with an associated acti vation key that defi nes your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia Nseries PC Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer th e activation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You ma y also need to restore the activation keys in case th e files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You ma y also lose the activati on keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may
Tools 96 limit your ability to use the sa me cont ent on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected conten t can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view the digital rights activation keys stored in your device, press , and select Tools > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose validity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exc eeded or there is a protected media file in the device b ut no connected activation k ey. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an invalid acti vation key and Options > Get new key . Activation keys cann ot be updated if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 70. To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the fil e, scroll to an activation key, and press . Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 80. To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications and profiles, you must open the Voice comm. application and its Pro files fol der. Press , and select Tools > Voice comm. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. To use enhanced voice commands, press and hold in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To use enhanced voice commands when the fold is closed, press and hold the forward key. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Opt ions > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, a bbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, select Option s > Playback . To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiz er that plays recognized voice tags and commands in the selected device language, select S ynthesise r > Off . To reset voice
Tools 97 recognition learning, for exampl e, when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapts. . Positioning Press , and select Ap plication s > GPS data or Landmarks . The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintenance. The accuracy of loca tion data ca n be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States go vernment and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civ il GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availa bili ty and quality of GPS signals may be affected by yo ur location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. GPS should only be used as a navigation aid. It should not be used for precise location measurement and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With Landmarks , you can save and view the position information of specifc locations in your device. With GPS data , you can access route guidance information to a selected destination, position info rmation about your current location, and travelin g information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximate duration of travel. Landmarks and GPS data may be network based (network service) or they may require that you use a compatible GPS receiver. For more information on Landmarks and GPS data , see the guides for your device at www.nokia.com/support or your local Nokia websit e.
Settings 98 Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to General , Phone , Connection , or Applications , and press . Scroll to a setting or setting group you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General To edit the general settings of your device or restore the original default device se ttings, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation , Date and time , Cover d isplay , En hancement , Security , Factory settings , or Positioning . For Date and time , see âÂÂClockâÂÂ, p. 65. Personalisation To edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functionality of your device, press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Gen eral > Personalisation . Tones allows you to change the tones of ca lendar, clock, and the currently active profile. Themes opens the application. See âÂÂChange the look of your deviceâÂÂ, p. 48. Voice comms. opens the setting s for the application. See âÂÂVoice commandsâÂÂ, p. 96. Display Light sensor âÂÂPress or to adjust the light se nsor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may ca use the display to flicker in low light. Font size âÂÂAdjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery . Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the d isplay is switched off.
Settings 99 Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicat ions in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 49. Shortcuts > Le ft selection key and Right selection key â Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active stan dby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for th e different presses of the scroll key. The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the displa y texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according t o the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Wr iting language affects every application in your device, and t he change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac te rs available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionar y is not available for all languages. Cover display Brightness âÂÂClose the fold, and use the volume key to adjust the brightness on the cover display. Answer if fold opened âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to answer incoming calls by opening the fold. Sleep mode âÂÂSelect whether the displa y is switched off to save battery power after the power saver is activated. When the display is switched of f, an LED blinks to indicate that the device is powered on. Enhancement For enhancement indica tors, see âÂÂEssential indicato rsâÂÂ, p. 17. Some enha ncement connectors do not indicate which type of an enhancement is connected to the device.
Settings 10 0 The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time yo u connect a cert ain compatible enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 47. Automatic answer âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disa bled. Lights âÂÂSet whether lights remain on, or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. If you are using a Te xt phone or a Loopset , you must activate it on your device. To activate Text phone , select Text phone > Use text phone > Yes . To activ ate the loopset, select Loopset > Use loopset > Yes . Security To edit settings relat ed to the security, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card , Certificate management , or Security module . Phone and SIM card PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, th e code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PI N and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 101. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period âÂÂSelect whether the keypad is locked when your devi ce has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip! To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press , then Phone autolock period âÂÂTo avoid unauthorized use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be us ed until the correct lock code is entered. To turn of f the autolock period, select None . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 101.
Settings 101 When the device is locked, ca lls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select L ock phone . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network se rvice). When calls are limited to clos ed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Glossary of PIN and lock co des If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification num ber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthor ized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code âÂÂThis code may b e suppl ied wit h the US IM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to ac cess some functions in your device. Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avo id unautho rized use. The fact ory setting f or the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. Personal unblockin g key (PUK ) code an d PUK2 co deâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a b locked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectiv ely. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact th e operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificat es do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software.
Settings 102 In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certific ates th at are stored in yo ur device. Press to see a list of personal certific at es, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. Th e y s h o u l d a l s o b e u s e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates make s the risks involved in remote conn ections and s oftware installation considerably sm aller, th ey must be us ed correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificat es for increased security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certifica te settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. View certificate deta ilsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificat e is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not truste d âÂÂYou have not set any applicati on to use the certificate. See âÂÂChange th e trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 102. Expired c ertificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. Certific ate not val id yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing any certificate settings, you must ma ke sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Settings 10 3 Scroll to an authority certificat e, and select Options > Trust settin gs . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. Symbian in stallation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Interne t : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java TM application. Select Options > Edit trus t setting to change the value. Security module To view or edit a secu rity module (if available) in Security module , scroll to it, and press . To view detailed information about a security modu le, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Factory settings To reset some of the settings to their original values, s elect Tools > Settings > General > Factory settings . To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂPhone and SIM cardâÂÂ, p. 100. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Positioning Select t he used Positioning methods to detect the location of your device: Bluetooth GPS to use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectiv ity, and Ne twork based to use information from the cellular network (network service). The location information can be used by compatible applications in your device. Phone To edit the settings related to making and receiving calls, press , and s elect Tools > Settings > Phone > Call , Call divert , Call barring , or Network . Call Send my caller ID âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displ ayed t o ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are call ing, or the v alue may be s et by your s ervice provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progr ess. Set the function on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the function is activated ( Check status ).
Settings 10 4 Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a calle r informing wh y you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or decline a callâÂÂ, p. 84. Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be s ent in a text messag e when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂIf video is not sent during a video call, you can select a still im age to be displayed instead. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call a fter an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automati c redialing, press . Show call duration âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Summary after call âÂÂTo have the duration of a c all briefly displayed after the call, select On . Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 79. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer a n incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscrib ed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lin es, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Call divert allows you to diver t your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you rejec t incoming ca lls, select If bus y . Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time.
Settings 10 5 Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict t he calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call divert ing cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to c ertain official emergency numbers. Network Your device can automati cally switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the wireless service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. Co ntact your service provider for more details. Operator select ion âÂÂSelect Automatic to set t he device to search for and select on e o f the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the con nection to th e manually sele cted network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to rese lect a network. The s elected ne twork must h ave a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use th e services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activ ate cell info reception. Connection To edit access point and othe r connection settings, press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Bluetooth , USB , Access points , Packet data , Data call , SIP settings , Configurations , or Access point name control . For USB settings, see âÂÂUSBâÂÂ, p. 61.
Settings 10 6 For Bluetooth settings, see âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 59. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, and acc ess points can share a data connec tion. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of ac cess points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠I nternet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access points You may receive access poi nt settings in a message f rom a service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. indicates a protected access point, and indicates a packet data access point. To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an acc ess point, select Optio ns > Edit . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data c onnection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. F ill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a da ta connection, the network service provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM ca rd. Packet data access points Follow the instructions fr om your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service pro vider.
Settings 10 7 Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the internet protocol type to use: IPv4 or IPv6 . The other settings depend on the selected network typ e. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂEnte r the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary DNS address , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Secondary DNS address , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy server address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connection âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device r egister s to the packet data netwo rk. Sta rting an active packet data connectio n (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select Wh en needed , the device uses a packet data connecti on only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Data call The data call settings affect all ac cess points using a GSM data call connection. Online time âÂÂSet the data calls to automatically disconnect after a time-out if there is no activity. To enter a time-out, select User defined , and enter the time in minutes. if you select Unlimited , data calls are not automatically disconnected.
Settings 10 8 SIP settings SIP (session initiation prot ocol) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP, such as video sharing. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings . Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration message. You can sa ve view or delete these settings in Configurations . Access point name control With Access point name control service, you can restrict packet data connections a nd allow your device to use only certain packet data acce ss points. This setting is only av ailable if your SIM card supports the access point control service. To set the control service on or off or to change the allowed access point s, select Options and the corresponding option. To change the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provider fo r the code. Applications To edit the settings of some o f the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . The settings are also available in each application by selecting the settings option.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 10 9 Troubleshooting: Q&A Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your wireless service provider. For information about passwords, contact your acc ess point provider, for example , a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider. Battery Q: Why does my bat tery drain fast? A: Features using Blue tooth technology, or all owing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce battery life time. Also packet data connection s increase the demand on battery power. If you have set Packet data connection to When available in Connection settings , and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), your device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection, which causes the increased demand on battery power. To prolong the operating t ime of your device, turn the Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it. Also set Packet data connection to When needed . To close all the applications that are running in the background, and you do not use, press and hold , and select the applications from the list. Then exit the application. Application n ot responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have activated Bluetooth connectivity, an d are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions betwee n the devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connect ed to your device, you c an either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetoot h connectivity. Se lect Tool s > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Camer a Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Display
Troubleshooting: Q&A 11 0 Q: Why do missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots t hat remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete unused items saved in your device regularly to avoid memory gett ing low. See âÂÂMemory lowâ free memoryâÂÂ, p. 20. To delete contact information, cale ndar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, o r any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory t o perform operatio n. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data from phone me mory. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the sm allest item). To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data gr oups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of t he following methods: â¢U s e N o k i a Nseries PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then sa ve the image s to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth co nnectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I sele ct a contact? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the miss ing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefl y. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that t he settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia msg. . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the de vice from making a data connection, press , and select Messagi ng > Op tions > Settings > Multimed ia message > Multimedia retrieval and one of the following: Manual âÂÂto have the multimedia mess aging center save messages to be retrieved later. You receive a notification when there is a new multim edia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center.
Troubleshooting: Q&A 111 Off âÂÂto ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia Nseries PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia Nseries PC Suite on the CD-ROM. For further information on ho w to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia Nserie s PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com. Q: Can I use my device as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (network servi c e), you can divert incoming fax calls to another phone number.
Battery information 11 2 Battery information Charging and disc harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged h undreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the b attery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is b eing used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely di scharged, it may take several minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be mad e. Use the battery only for it s intended purpose. Neve r use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with wate r, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from
Battery information 11 3 an authori zed Nokia d ealer, lo ok for the No kia Origin al Enhancements logo on the packaging, and inspect the hologram label using the following s teps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your batter y is not an authent ic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Noki a s ervice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authenticit y. If authenticity ca nnot be verified, return the battery to th e place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle t he hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 do ts on each side respectively. 3 Scratc h the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for exampl e, 12345678919876 543210. Turn the battery so th at the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 4 Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/batterycheck. To create a text message, enter the 20-digit code, for example, 123456 78919876543210, an d send to 44 7786 200276. To create a text message, ⢠For countries in Asia Pacifi c, excluding India: Enter the 20-digit code, for example, 123456789198765 43210, and send to 61 427151515. ⢠For India only: Enter Battery followed by the 20-digit battery code, for example, Battery 12345678919876 543210, and se nd to 5555. National and international operator charges will apply.
Battery information 11 4 You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approv al or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 11 5 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith ca re. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the de vice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving pa rts and ele ctronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than as ins tructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device. Rough handling can break intern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to cle an the device. ⢠Do not paint the device . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light s ensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backu p of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calend ar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and re move the battery. These suggestions apply e qually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facil ity for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrica l and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to se parate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection t o prevent possible harm to the environment or huma n health from uncontrolled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collect ion information is available from the product retailer, local waste authori ties, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, s ee product Eco-
Care and maintenance 11 6 Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.com.
Additional safety information 11 7 Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain sm all parts. Keep them out of the re ach of small chil dren. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/8 inch es) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contai n metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, t ransmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is av ailable. Ensure the abov e separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to th e device. Do not place credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Cons ult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospit als or heal th care facilitie s may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cent imeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wirele ss device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons w ho have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.
Additional safety information 11 8 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical devi ce. If you have any questions abou t using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless device s may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, e lectronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, o f your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service t he device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate a ny warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equi pment in your vehicle is mounted and operating prop erly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or ex plosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles eq uipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, seriou s injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the w ireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and ob ey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dis tribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmos phere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on b oats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehi cles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas w here the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
Additional safety information 11 9 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for es sential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls . 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in us e, you may first need to t urn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to act ivate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Cons ult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (S AR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines . These guidelines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety marg ins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices e mploy a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount cha n ges depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork ba se station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.04 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
120 Index A access point name control 108 access points 105 activation keys See digital rights manageme nt active standby mode 49 active toolbar 31 Adobe reader 91 alarm clo ck 65 application manager 93 applications installing 93 Java 93 removing 94 automati c answer 100 B backing up data 19 batteries authenti cating 112 charging 112 intended for use 9 Bluetooth connectivity 58 device address 60 pairing 60 security 59 sending data 59 switching off 59 bookmarks 51 C cache, clearing 56 calculator 91 calendar creating entries 65 synchronizing Nokia Nseries PC Suite 66 call log See log calls answering 84 barring 105 declining 84 diverting 104 duration 85 international 78 making 78 missed 85 received 85 settings 103 sharing video 82 transferring 85 waiting 85 camera active toolbar 30 adjusting lighting and color 33 editing videos 43 flash 33 fold-closed mode 29 fold-open mode 29 image setup settings 33 saving video clips 35 scenes 34 self-timer 35 sequence mode 34 shooting video 35 still image camera settings 32 taking pictures 29 video recorder settings 37 capture key 15 cell broadcast 76 certificates 101 chargers 9 chat
12 1 See instant messaging clock 65 codes 101 color tone 33 computer connections 62 conferenc e call 79 configurations 108 connection settings 105 contact c ards 88 inserting pictures 88 sending 88 contact information 11 converter 91 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 89 copyright protection See digital rights manageme nt cover di splay fold closed 13 personalisation 49 settings 99 D data cable 61 data call, settings 107 data connections details 58 ending 58 establishing 106 indicators 17 network 8 , 105 settings 105 date 65 delivery reports 74 device manager 62 dictionary 68 digital rights management 95 DRM See digital rights management E edit key 14 editing images 42 e-mail automatic retrievin g 72 deleting mailbox 74 deleting messages 72 opening 71 , 72 remote mailbox 71 retrieving from mailbox 71 saving 76 sending 68 settings 74 viewing attachments 72 writing 68 enhancement settings 99 exposure compensation 33 F file formats .3gp 29 .jad 93 .jar 93 , 94 .mp4 29 .sis 93 music player 21 RealPlayer 27 file manager 19 fixed dialing 89 FM radio 25 fold-closed mode 13 fold-open mode 14 font size 98 G gallery active toolbar 39 editing images 42 free memory 40 images and videos 35 , 38 ordering files in albums 40 , 42 presentations 44 print basket 40 printing images 41 slide show 43 GPRS See data conn ections
122 GPS positioning 97 H hands-free operation See loudspeaker headset 18 help application 11 I idle sceen See standby mode images See gallery indicators essential 17 still image camera 30 video capture 36 installing applications 93 instant messaging 77 internet See web internet access points ( IAP) See access points J Java 93 K keyguard 18 , 100 keypad lock 18 , 100 keys 14 L language settings 99 LED 18 , 99 light sensitivity 33 lock code 101 log duration 86 erasing contents 86 filtering 86 loudspeaker 18 M mailbox 71 maintenanc e 115 media keys 15 memory freeing memory 20 , 40, 85 viewing memory consumption 20 memory card memory card tool 19 menu key 14 menu, rearranging 47 messaging cell broadcast 76 e-mail 68 inbox 69 mailbox 71 multimedia messages 68 settings 73 text messages 68 microSD card 19 missed calls 85 MMS See multimedia messages mode key 15 modes accessing features 12 fold closed 13 fold open 14 movies, muvees custom muvees 44 quick muvees 44 multimedia key 14 multimedia messages creating 68 receiving 69 retrieving 70 saving 76 sending 68 settings 73 music See music player music player downloading music 23 file formats 21
123 music shop 23 playlists 22 transferring music 23 N network mode 105 Nokia Lifeblog 28 notes 92 O offline profile 48 P packet data settings 10 7 PC connections 62 pdf files 91 personalization 48 phone language 99 phone book See contact cards PIN codes 101 positioning 97 power saver 98 power saver LED 18 printing images 41 profiles 47 PUK codes 101 push to talk 86 Q quick cover keys 15 R radio 25 RealPlayer 27 recent calls 85 recor der 92 remote mailbox 71 remote SIM mode 61 resolu tion image capture 29 image quality settings 32 video quality settings 37 ringing tones personal ringing tone 90 See also profiles S safety additional information 117 emergency calls 119 guidelines 7 scenes image scenes 34 video scenes 34 screen saver 49 scroll key 14 security code See lock code security se ttings 100 self-t imer, camer a 35 sending contact card s, business car ds 88 messages 68 sequence mode 34 service comm ands 67 setting s access points 106 application 98 Bluetooth connectiv i ty 59 call barring 105 call diverting 104 certificates 101 cover displ ay 99 data call 107 data connections 105 defining 12 display 98 e-mail 71 , 74 enhancements 99 general 98 keypad lock 100 language 99 lock code 101 messaging 73 multimedia messages 73
124 original settings 10 3 personalisation 98 personalizing the phone 47 PIN code 101 power saver 98 security 100 SIP 108 text messages 73 UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 settings wizard 12 SIM card copying names and numbers to your device 89 messages 72 names and numbers 89 using device without a SIM card 48 sis file 93 sleep mode 18 , 99 SMS See text messages snooze 65 software installing applications 93 removing applications 94 transferring a file to your device 93 software update 12 songs file formats 21 transferring 23 sound clips 38 sounds adjusting volume 18 muting a ringing tone 84 recording sounds 92 speaker phone See loudspeaker speed dialing 79 , 104 standby mode 47 , 99 support information 11 svg files 44 synchronization 62 T text messages inbox 67 receiving 69 saving 76 sendin g 68 , 69 settings 73 writin g 69 themes 48 time 65 tones See ringing tones transferring content from another device 16 transferring music 23 troubleshooting 109 U UMTS See data connections UPIN code 101 UPUK code 101 USB data cable 61 USSD commands 67 V video call answering 84 making 80 rejecting 84 video clips 38 video player See RealPlayer videos See gallery Visual Radio 25 voice commands 96 voice dialing 80 voice mailbox 79 changing the phone number 79 diverting calls to voice mailbox 104
125 voice me ssages 79 voice t ags 96 making calls 80 volume co ntrol adjusting volume 18 during a call 78 loudspeaker 18 volume ke ys 15 W wallpapers changing 48 cover display 49 using pictures 32 , 39 web access points, See access points blogs 55 browser 51 feeds 55 service messages 70 weblog 28 welcome application 12 white balance 33 wireless keybo ard 92 writing language 99